Перевод: со всех языков на английский

a word beginning with J

1 cominciare

start, begin (a to)

a cominciare da oggi (starting) from today

tanto per cominciare to begin or start with

* * *

cominciare v.tr. e intr. to begin*; to start; to commence: cominciò un lavoro interessante, he began an interesting job; cominciò il viaggio da Genova, he started his trip from Genoa; hai già cominciato a leggere quel libro?, have you started (reading) that book, yet?; cominciò a piovere, it began raining (o to rain); cominciò col dire, he began by saying; oggi cominceremo da pagina 60, today we'll begin at page 60; a cominciare da oggi, from today on (o as from today on); per cominciare, to begin (o to start); ci proveremo tutti, a cominciare da me, we'll all try, beginning with me; è cominciato lo sciopero, the strike has begun // chi ben comincia, è a metà dell'opera, (prov.) well begun is half done.

* * *
[komin'tʃare]
1. vt

to start, begin

hai cominciato il libro che ti ho prestato? — have you started the book I lent you?

cominciare a fare/col fare — to begin to do/by doing

ha cominciato a ridere — she started to laugh

ha cominciato a piangere — she started crying

2. vi

(aus essere) to start, begin

una parola che comincia per J — a word beginning with J

il film comincia con un'esplosione — the film starts with an explosion

tanto per cominciare — to start with

tanto per cominciare non sappiamo se funzionerà — in the first place we don't know if it'll work

a cominciare da domani — starting (from) tomorrow

cominciamo bene! iro — we're off to a fine start!

* * *
[komin'tʃare] 1.
verbo transitivo to begin*, to start [lavoro, viaggio, giornata]

cominciare a fare qcs. — to begin o start doing o to do sth.

ho cominciato a pensare che — I got to thinking that
2.
verbo intransitivo (aus. essere)

1) (avere inizio) to begin*, to start

non cominciare! — (in una lite) don't start on me!

un nome che comincia con la C — a name beginning with C

cominciare col fare — to begin o start off by doing

cominciamo bene — iron. that's a good start

cominciare da zero — to start from scratch

2) a cominciare da

a cominciare da oggi — from this day on o forth

siete tutti colpevoli a cominciare da te — you're all guilty starting with you
3.
verbo impersonale (aus. essere, avere)

comincia a piovere — it's beginning to rain

comincia a farsi buio — it's getting o growing dark

••

tanto per cominciare — for a start, to begin o start with

* * *

cominciare

/komin't∫are/ [1]

I verbo transitivo

to begin*, to start [lavoro, viaggio, giornata]; cominciare a fare qcs. to begin o start doing o to do sth.; ho cominciato a pensare che I got to thinking that

II verbo intransitivo

(aus. essere)

1 (avere inizio) to begin*, to start; non cominciare! (in una lite) don't start on me! un nome che comincia con la C a name beginning with C; cominciare col fare to begin o start off by doing; cominciamo bene iron. that's a good start; cominciare da zero to start from scratch

2 a cominciare da a cominciare da oggi from this day on o forth; siete tutti colpevoli a cominciare da te you're all guilty starting with you

III verbo impersonale

(aus. essere, avere) comincia a piovere it's beginning to rain; comincia a farsi buio it's getting o growing dark

IDIOMS

tanto per cominciare for a start, to begin o start with.

Dizionario Italiano-Inglese > cominciare
2 búsqueda truncada

(n.) = truncated search

Ex. Truncated searches obtain all significant word beginning with a given character string.

* * *

(n.) = truncated search

Ex: Truncated searches obtain all significant word beginning with a given character string.

Spanish-English dictionary > búsqueda truncada
3 περί

περί, Thess., Delph. περ IG9(2).517.17 (iii B.C.), al., Schwyzer 323 A4 (v/iv B.C.), also [dialect] Aeol., v. infr. A. V ; Elean παρ ib.413.4: Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.:—

A round about, all round (prop. different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Skt. pári 'round about'.)

A WITH GENITIVE,

I of Place, sts. in Poets, round about, around, τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς Od.5.68
; τείχη π. Δαρδανίας E. Tr. 818
(lyr., s.v.l.); εἴλυμα π. χροός A.R.2.1129
: rarely, like ἀμφί, on both sides, v. περιβαίνω 1 fin.

2 about near, π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα IG14.2508
([place name] Nemausus).

II to denote the object about or for which one does something:

1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, Il.23.659 ; π. πτόλιος.. μαχήσεται 18.265
; π. Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος ib. 195, cf. 17.120; π. σεῖο 3.137
; π. νηὸς ἔχον πόνον 15.416
; ἀμύνεσθαι π. πάτρης, π. νηῶν, π. τέκνων, 12.243, 142, 170, etc.; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it was for my life, Od.9.423 ; π. ψυχῆς θέον Ἕκτορος Il.22.161
; π. ψυχέων ἐμάχοντο Od.22.245
; in Prose, τρέχειν π. ἑωυτοῦ, π. τῆς ψυχῆς, Hdt.7.57,9.37; ἀγῶνας δραμέονται π. σφέων αὐτῶν Id.8.102
; νεναυμάχηκε τὴν π. τῶν κρεῶν Ar. Ra. 191
; <τὸν> π. τοῦ παντὸς δρόμον θέοντες Hdt.8.74
; κινδυνεύειν π. τινός ibid., etc.; οὐ π. τῶν ἴσων ὁ κίνδυνός ἐστι X.HG7.1.7
; and without a Verb, π. γῆς ὅρων διαφοραί Th.1.122
; π. πάντων ἀγαθῶν ὁ ἀγών X.Cyr. 3.3.44
, cf. S.Aj. 936(lyr.), etc.; μάχη π. τινός Pl.Tht. 179d
; ἐπειγόμενοι π. νίκης Il.23.437
, cf. 639, Hdt.8.26 ; πεῖραν θανάτου π. καὶ ζωᾶς ἀναβάλλεσθαι Pi.N.9.29
; π. θανάτου φεύγειν Antipho 5.95
; but ἐρίσσαι π. μύθων contend about speaking, i. e. who can speak best, Il.15.284 ; καὶ ἀθανάτοισιν ἐρίζεσκον π. τόξων Od.8.225
, cf. 24.515.

2 with words which denote care or anxiety, about, on account of, π. Τρώων.. μερμηρίζειν Il.20.17
; ἄχος π. τινός Od.21.249
; φόνου π. βουλεύειν 16.234
; φροντίζειν π. τινός Hdt.8.36
, etc.; κήδεσθαι π. τ. S.Ph. 621
; δεδιέναι π. τ. Pl.Prt. 320a
, etc.; ἀπολογεῖσθαι π. τ. X.Cyr.2.2.13
; κρίνειν, διαγιγνώσκειν π. τ., Pi.N.5.40, Antipho 5.96; π. τ. ψηφίζεσθαι, διαψηφίζεσθαι, ψῆφον φέρειν, IG12.57.42, X.HG2.3.50, Lycurg.11 ; βουλεύεσθαι π. τῆς κοινῆς σωτηρίας Isoc.5.69
; π. Μεθωναίων IG12.57.49
; διανοεῖσθαι, σκοπεῖν π. τινός, Pl.Phdr. 270d, Phd. 65e; μαντεύεσθαι π. τ. Hdt.8.36
, cf. S.Tr.77 ; π. πότου γοῦν ἐστί σοι; so with you it is a question of drink? Ar.Eq.87, cf. Plu.2.43b.

3 with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, etc., about, concerning, π. νόστου ἄκουσα Od.19.270
; οἶδα γὰρ εὖ π. κείνου 17.563
; π. πομπῆς μνησόμεθα 7.191
; π. πατρὸς ἐρέσθαι 1.135
, 3.77 ; π. τινὸς ἐρέειν, λέγειν, λόγον ποιήσασθαι, etc., Hdt. 1.5, S.OT 707, X.Cyr.1.6.13, etc.; λέγειν καὶ ἀκούειν π. ἑκάστου Th.4.22
, etc.; λόγος π. τινός Pl.Prt. 347b
, etc.; ἡ π. τινὸς φήμη Aeschin.1.48
; π. τινὸς ἀγγεῖλαι, κηρῦξαι, S.El. 1111, Ant. 193 ; π. τινὸς διελθεῖν, διεξελθεῖν, διηγεῖσθαι, Isoc.9.2, Pl.Plt. 274b, Euthphr.6c, etc.; παίζειν π. τινός X.Mem.1.3.8
; ἐμπειροτέρως ἔχειν π. τινός Aeschin.1.82
; νόμον γράψαι π. τινός X.HG2.3.52
, etc.; νόμῳ χρῆσθαι π. τινός S.Ant. 214
.

4 of impulse or motive rather than object, ἐμαρνάσθην ἔριδος πέρι fought for very enmity, Il.7.301, cf. 16.476, 20.253.

5 about, in regard to, μεμηνυμένος π. τινός Th.6.53
; οὕτως ἔσχε π. τοῦ πρήγματος τούτου Hdt.1.117
; τὰ π. τῶν Πλαταιῶν γεγενημένα Th.2.6
; τὸ π. τούτου γεγονός Plb.1.54.5
: in Prose freq. without a Verb, ἡ π. τῶν Μαντινικῶν πρᾶξις Th.6.88
; τὰ π. τινός the circumstances of.., ib.32, 8.14,26, etc. (cf. infr. C. 1.5); οὕτω δὴ καὶ π. τῶν ἀρετῶν (sc. ἔχει) Pl.Men. 72c, cf. R. 534b, 551c, etc.; π. τοῦ καταλειφθῆναι τὸν σῖτον as for reserving the corn, PMich.Zen.28.5 (iii B.C.): without the Art., ἀριθμοῦ πέρι as to number, Hdt.7.102; χρηστηρίων δὲ πέρι .. Id.2.54.

III before, above, beyond, of superiority, chiefly in [dialect] Ep., π. πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων Il.1.287
; π. δ' ἄλλων φασὶ γενέσθαι 4.375
; τετιμῆσθαι π. πάντων 9.38
; ὃν π. πάσης τῖεν ὁμηλικίης 5.325
; ὃν.. π. πάντων φίλατο παίδων 20.304
; π. πάντων ἴδριες ἀνδρῶν Od.7.108
; κρατερὸς π. πάντων Il.21.566
, cf. 1.417, Od.11.216: in this sense freq. divided from its gen., π. φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων in understanding to be beyond them, Il.17.171, cf. 1.258, Od.1.66 ; π. μὲν εἶδος, π. δ' ἔργα τέτυκτο τῶν ἄλλων Δαναῶν Il.17.279
; π. μὲν κρατέεις, π. δ' αἴσυλα ῥέζεις ἀνδρῶν 21.214
; π. δ' ἔγχει Ἀχαιῶν φέρτατός ἐσσι 7.289
, cf. Pi.O.6.50, Theoc. 25.119.—In this sense π. is sts. adverbial, and the gen. is absent, v. infr. E. II.

IV in Hdt. and [dialect] Att. Prose, to denote value, ἡμῖν π. πολλοῦ ἐστι it is of much consequence, worth much, to us, Hdt.1. 120, cf. Antipho 6.3 ; π. πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τινας to reckon them for, i.e. worth, much, Hdt.1.73, X.Mem.2.3.10, etc.; π. πλείονος, π. πλείστου ποιεῖσθαι, Id.An.7.7.44, Cyr.7.5.60 ; π. πλείστου ἡγεῖσθαι Th.2.89
; π. παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι X.Cyr.1.4.1
; π. ἐλάττονος ἡγούμενοι, π. οὐδενὸς ἡγήσασθαι, Lys.2.71,31.31.

V [dialect] Aeol. περί and περ = ὑπέρ, στροῦθοι περὶ γᾶς.. δίννεντες πτέρα Sapph.1.10; περ κεφάλας prob. in Alc.93, cf. 18 ; περρ ἁπαλῶ στύματός σε πεδέρχομαι Theoc.29.25
; also Hellenistic, ὃ διέγραψε Προῖτος περί μου paid on my behalf, PCair. Zen.790.23 (iii B. C.), cf. UPZ57.12 (ii B. C.).

B WITH DATIVE (in [dialect] Att. Prose mostly in signf. 11, esp. in Th.),

I of Place, round about, around, of close-fitting dresses, armour, etc., ἔνδυνε π. στήθεσσι χιτῶνα Il.10.21
; χιτῶνα π. χροῒ δῦνεν Od.15.60
; δύσετο τεύχεα καλὰ π. χροΐ Il.13.241
; ἕσσαντο π. χροῒ χαλκόν Od.24.467
; κνημῖδας.. π. κνήμῃσιν ἔθηκε Il.11.17
; βεβλήκει τελαμῶνα π. στήθεσσι 12.401
: in Prose, π. τῇσι κεφαλῇσι εἶχον τιάρας Hdt.7.61
; θώρακα π. τοῖς στέρνοις ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.13
; οἱ στρεπτοὶ οἱ π. τῇ δέρῃ καὶ τὰ ψέλια π. ταῖς χερσί ib.1.3.2. ; π. τῇ χειρὶ δακτύλιον ὄντα Pl.R. 359e
, etc.; χαλκὸς ἔλαμπε π. στήθεσσι Il.13.245
; χιτῶνα π. στήθεσσι δαΐξαι 2.416
; πήληξ.. κονάβησε π. κροτάφοισι 15.648
; in other relations, π. δ' ἔγχεϊ χεῖρα καμεῖται will grow weary by grasping the spear, 2.389 ; δράκων ἑλισσόμενος π. χειῇ 22.95
; κνίση ἑλισσομένη π. καπνῷ 1.317
; π. σταχύεσσιν ἐέρση 23.598
; μάρναντο π. Σκαιῇσι πύλῃσιν 18.453
: rarely in Trag., π. βρέτει πλεχθείς A.Eu. 259
(lyr.); κεῖται νεκρὸς π. νεκρῷ S.Ant. 1240
.

2 in Poets, also, around a weapon, i. e. spitted upon it, transfixed by it, π. δουρὶ πεπαρμένη Il.21.577
; ἐρεικόμενος π. δουρί 13.441
; κυλινδόμενος π. χαλκῷ 8.86
; π. δουρὶ ἤσπαιρε 13.570
; πεπτῶτα π. ξίφει S.Aj. 828
; αἷμα ἐρωήσει π. δουρί Il.1.303
.

3 of a warrior standing over a dead comrade so as to defend him, ἀμφὶ δ' ἄρ' αὐτῷ βαῖν', ὥς τις π. πόρτακι μήτηρ 17.4
; ἑστήκει, ὥς τίς τε λέων π. οἷσι τέκεσσι ib. 133 ; Αἴας π. Πατρόκλῳ.. βεβήκει ib. 137, cf. 355 ; π. σκύμνοισι βεβηκώς Ar.Eq. 1039
.

II of an object for or about which one struggles (cf. supr. A. 11.1), π. οἷσι μαχειόμενος κτεάτεσσι Od.17.471
; μαχήσασθαι π. δαιτί 2.245
; π. παιδὶ μάχης πόνος Il.16.568
; ἄνδρα π. ᾗ πατρίδι μαρνάμενον Tyrt.10.2
; π. τοῖς φιλτάτοις κυβεύειν Pl.Prt. 314a
; π. τῇ Σικελίᾳ ἔσται ὁ ἀγών Th.6.34
codd.; κινδυνεύειν π. αὑτῷ Antipho 5.6
.

2 with Verbs denoting care, anxiety, or the opposite (cf. supr. A. 11.2), π. γὰρ δίε ποιμένι λαῶν, μή τι πάθοι Il.5.566
; ἔδεισεν δὲ π. ξανθῷ Μενελάῳ 10.240
, cf. 11.557; δεδιότες π. τῷ χωρίῳ Th.1.60
, cf. 74, 119, Ar.Eq.27; θαρρεῖν π. τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῇ Pl.Phd. 114d
, cf. Tht. 148c; π. πλέγματι γαθεῖ Theoc.1.54
.

3 generally, of the cause or occasion, on account of, by reason of, ἀτύζεσθαι π. καπνῷ, v.l. for ὑπὸ καπνοῦ in Il.8.183; μὴ π. Μαρδονίῳ πταίσῃ ἡ Ἑλλάς Hdt.9.101
; π. σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πταῖσαι Th.6.33
; π. αὑτῷ σφαλῆναι Id.1.69
: in Poets, π. δείματι for fear, Pi.P.5.58 ; π. τιμᾷ in honour or praise, ib.2.59; π. τάρβει, π. φόβῳ, A.Pers. 696 (lyr.), Ch.35(lyr.); π. χάρματι h.Cer. 429
:—but π. θυμῷ is f.l. in Hdt.3.50.

C WITH ACCUSATIVE,

I of Place, prop. of the object round about which motion takes place, π. βόθρον ἐφοίτων came flocking round the pit, Od.11.42 ; π. νεκρὸν ἤλασαν ἵππους Il.23.13
; π. τέρματα ἵπποι τρωχῶσι 22.162
; ἄστυ πέρι.. διώκειν ib. 173, 230 ; ἐρύσας π. σῆμα 24.16
, cf. 51, etc.; π. φρένας ἤλυθ' ἰωή 10.139
; π. φρένας ἤλυθε οἶνος Od.9.362
: also of extension round, ἑστάμεναι π. τοῖχον, π. βωμόν, Il.18.374, Od.13.187, etc.; λέξασθαι π. ἄστυ Il.8.519
; μάρνασθαι π. ἄ. 6.256
, etc.; φυλάσσοντας π. μῆλα 12.303
; οἳ π. Πηνειὸν.. ναίεσκον, π. Δωδώνην.. οἰκί' ἔθεντο, 2.757, 750; σειρήν κεν π. ῥίον Οὐλύμποιο δησαίμην 8.25
, cf. Od.18.67: in Prose, ἰκριῶσαι π. τὼ ἀγάλματε IG12.371.22
; φυλακὰς δεῖ π. τὸ στρατόπεδον εἶναι X.An. 5.1.9
; π. τὴν κρήνην εὕδειν somewhere near it, Pl.Phdr. 259a, cf. X.Cyr. 1.2.9; εἶναι π. τὸν λαγώ Id.Cyn.4.4
; π. λίθον πεσών upon it, Ar.Ach. 1180; π. αὑτὰ καταρρεῖν collapse upon themselves, D.2.10; ταραχθεῖσαι [αἱ νῆες] π. ἀλλήλας Th.7.23
; πλεῦνες π. ἕνα many to one, Hdt.7.103 ; π. τὸν ἄρξαντα.. τὸ ἀδίκημά ἐστι is imputable to him who.., Antipho 4.4.2 : freq. with a Subst. only, ἡ π. Λέσβον ναυμαχία the sea-fight off Lesbos, X.HG2.3.32 ; οἱ π. τὴν Ἔφεσον Pl.Tht. 179e
; στρατηγοὶ π. Πελοπόννησον IG12.324.18
: strengthd., π. τ' ἀμφί τε τάφρον Il.17.760
; π. τ' ἀμφί τε κύματα Hes.Th. 848
; cf. ἀμφί c. 1.2.

2 of persons who are about one, ἔχειν τινὰ π. αὑτόν X.HG5.3.22
; esp. οἱ π. τινά a person's attendants, connexions, associates, or colleagues, οἱ π. τὸν Πείσανδρον πρέσβεις Th.8.63
; οἱ π. Ἡράκλειτον his school, Pl.Cra. 440c, cf. X.An.1.5.8, etc.; οἱ π. Ἀρχίαν πολέμαρχοι Archias and his colleagues, Id.HG5.4.2, cf. An.2.4.2, etc.; οἱ π. τινά so-and-so and his family, PGrenf.1.21.16 (ii B.C.), etc.; later οἱ π. τινά, periphr. for the person himself, οἱ π. Φαβρίκιον Fabricius, Plu.Pyrrh.20, cf. Tim.13, IGRom.3.883.14 (Tarsus, ii/iii A.D.); cf. ἀμφί C. 1.3.

3 of the object about which one is occupied or concerned, π. δόρπα πονεῖσθαι, π. δεῖπνον πένεσθαι, Il.24.444, Od.4.624 (but π. τεύχε' ἕπουσι, tmesis for περιέπουσι, Il.15.555); later mostly εἶναι π. τι, Th.7.31, X.HG2.2.4; γενέσθαι Isoc.3.12
; π. γυναῖκας γενέσθαι Vett. Val.17.20; ὄντων ἡμῶν π. ταύτην τὴν πραγματείαν D.48.6
; διατρῖψαι π. τὴν θήραν X.Cyr.1.2.11
, etc.: less freq. ἔχειν π. τινάς Id.HG7.4.28
, Gal.15.442; in periphr. phrases, οἱ π. τὴν ποίησιν καὶ τοὺς λόγους ὄντες poets and orators, Isoc.12.35 ; οἱ π. τὴν φιλοσοφίαν ὄντες Id.9.8
; οἱ π. τὴν μουσικήν ib.4 ; οἱ π. τὰς τελετάς ministers of the mysteries, Pl.Phd. 69c ; ὁ π. τὸν ἵππον the groom, X. Eq.6.3; cf. ἀμφί C. 1.6.

4 round or about a place, and so in, π. νῆσον ἀλώμενοι Od.4.368
, cf. 90; ἐμέμηκον π. σηκούς 9.439
; ἃν π. ψυχὰν γάθησεν in his heart, Pi.P.4.122 ; χρονίζειν π. Αἴγυπτον Hdt.3.61
, cf. 7.131; εὕροι ἄν τις [βασιλείας] π. τοὺς βαρβάρους Pl.R. 544d
, etc.; οἱ π. Φωκίδα τόποι Plb.5.24.12
, etc.

5 about, in the case of, τὰ π. τὴν Αἴγυπτον γεγονότα, τὰ π. Μίλητον γενόμενα, Hdt.3.13, 6.26 ; εὐσεβεῖν π. θεούς Pl.Smp. 193a
; ἀσεβεῖν π. ξένους X.Cyr.5.2.10
; ἁμαρτάνειν π. τινάς Id.An.3.2.20
; ἀνήρ ἐστιν ἀγαθὸς π. τὸν δῆμον τὸν Ἀθηναίων IG12.59.10
; ἄνδρ' ἀγαθὸν ὄντα Μαραθῶνι π. τὴν πόλιν Ar.Ach. 696
; τοιαύτην γνώμην ἔχειν π. τὸν πατέρα Lys.10.21
; οὐδεμία συμφορὴ.. ἔσται.. π. οἶκον τὸν σόν Hdt.8.102
; ποιέειν or πράττειν τι π. τινά, Id.1.158, Pl.Grg. 507a; τὰ π. Πρηξάσπεα πρηχθέντα Hdt.3.76
; καινοτομεῖν π. τὰ θεῖα Pl. Euthphr.3b
; π. θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν X.Mem.1.1.20
; σπουδάζειν π. τινά promote his cause, Isoc.1.10: without a Verb, αἱ π. τοὺς παῖδας συμφοραί X.Cyr.7.2.20
; ἡ π. αὑτὸν ἐπιμέλεια Isoc.9.2
; ἡ π. ἡμᾶς ἡνιόχησις Pl.Phdr. 246b
: generally, of all relations, about, concerning, in respect of, π. μὲν τοὺς ἰχθύας οὕτως ἔχει Hdt.2.93
, cf. 8.86; πονηρὸν π. τὸ σῶμα Pl.Prt. 313d
; ἀκόλαστος π. ταῦτα Aeschin.1.42
; γελοῖος π. τὰς διατριβάς ib.126 ; ξυνηνέχθη θόρυβος π. τὸν Ἀστύοχον Th.8.84
; as to (cf. A. 11.5), π. τὸ παρὸν πάθος Pl.Tht. 179c
, cf. Phd. 65a : freq. in place of an Adj., ὄργανα ὅσα π. γεωργίαν, i.e. γεωργικά, Id.R. 370d ; οἱ νόμοι οἱ π. τοὺς γάμους Id.Cri. 50d
; αἱ π. τὰ μαθήματα ἡδοναί Id.Phlb. 51e
; also in place of a gen., οἱ π. Αυσίαν λόγοι the speeches of L., Id.Phdr. 279a; ἡ π. Φίλιππον τυραννίς the despotism of P., X.HG5.4.2 ; ἀκρασίας τῆς π. τὸν θυμόν Arist.EN 1149b19
: in Prose, to denote circumstances connected with any person or thing, τὰ π. Κῦρον, τὰ π. Ἑλένην, τὰ π. Βάττον, Hdt.1.95, 2.113, 4.154 ; τὰ π. τὸν Ἄθων the works at Mount Athos, Id.7.37; τὰ π. τὰς ναῦς naval affairs, Th.1.13; τὰ π. τὴν ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for τῆς ναυμαχίας ) the events of.., Id.8.63; τὰ π. τὸν πόλεμον Pl.R. 468a
; τὰ π. τὸ σῶμα Id.Phdr. 246d
; τὰ π. τοὺς θεούς X.Cyr.8.1.23
, etc.; cf. ἀμφί c.1.4.

II of Time, π. λύχνων ἁφάς about the time of lamp-lighting, Hdt.7.215; π. μέσας νύκτας about midnight, X.An.1.7.1; π. πλήθουσαν ἀγοράν ib.2.1.7; π. ἡλίου δυσμάς ib.6.5.32 ; π. τούτους τοὺς χρόνους Th.3.89
, etc.

2 of round numbers, π. ἑβδομήκοντα about seventy, Id.1.54; π. ἑπτακοσίους X.HG2.4.5
, etc.

D Position: π. may follow its Subst., when it suffers anastrophe, ἄστυ πέρι Il.22.173
; ἔριδος πέρι 16.476
: most freq. with gen., τοῦδε πράγματος πέρι A.Eu. 630
; τῶνδε βουλεύειν πέρι Id.Th. 248
, etc. (S. only once uses it before its gen., Aj. 150 (anap.)): in Prose, σφέων αὐτῶν πέρι Hdt.8.36
; σοφίας πέρι Pl.Phlb. 49a
; δικαίων τε πέρι καὶ ἀδίκων Id.Grg. 455a
, etc.; γραμμάτων εἴπομεν ὡς οὐχ ἱκανῶς ἔχεις πέρι Id.Lg. 809e
, cf. Ap. 19c.

E περί abs., as ADV., around, about, also, near, by, freq. in Hom., γέλασσε δὲ πᾶσα π. χθών Il.19.362
, al.: strengthd.,
περί τ' ἀμφί τε κάλλος ἄητο
round about, h.Cer.276
, cf. Call.Hec.1.1.13.

II before or above others (cf. A. 111), exceedingly, only [dialect] Ep., in which case it commonly suffers anastrophe, Τυδεΐδη, πέρι μέν σε τίον Δαναοί Il.8.161
, cf. 9.53; σε χρὴ πέρι μὲν φάσθαι ἔπος ἠδ' ἐπακοῦσαι ib. 100; τοι πέρι δῶκε θεὸς πολεμήϊα ἔργα 13.727
; ἅ οἱ πέρι δῶκεν Ἀθήνη Od.2.116
, cf. 7.110; πέρι γάρ μιν ὀϊζυρὸν τέκε μήτηρ 3.95
; πέρι κέρδεα οἶδεν 2.88
; τὸν πέρι Μοῦσ' ἐφίλησεν 8.63
.

2 π. does not suffer anastrophe in the [dialect] Ep. phrase π. κῆρι right heartily, π. κῆρι φίλησε Il.13.430
, etc. ( κῆρι φιλεῖν alone, 9.117); ἀπέχθωνται π. κῆρι 4.53
; π. κῆρι τιέσκετο ib.46, cf. Od.5.36, 7.69; π. κῆρι.. ἐχολώθη Il.13.206
; also π. φρεσὶν ἄσπετος ἀλκή 16.157
; π. φρεσὶν αἴσιμα ᾔδη Od.14.433
; ἀλύσσοντες π. θυμῷ Il.22.70
, cf. Od.14.146; π. σθένεϊ Il.17.22
.

3 for περὶ πρό, v. περιπρό.

4 περὶ κάτω bottom upwards, δῖνος π. κάτω τετραμμένος Stratt.34
, cf. Phot.; τὴν κόγχην στρέψας π. τὰ κάτω Ael.NA9.34
.

F IN COMPOS. all its chief senses recur, esp.

I extension in all directions as from a centre, all round, as in περιβάλλω, περιβλέπω, περιέχω.

II completion of an orbit and return to the same point, about, as in περιάγω, περιβαίνω, περίειμι ( εἶμι ibo), περιέρχομαι, περιστρέφω.

III a going over or beyond, above, before, as in περιβαίνω III, περιβάλλω v, περιγίγνομαι, περιεργάζομαι, περιτοξεύω.

IV generally, a strengthening of the simple notion, beyond measure, very, exceedingly, as in περικαλλής, περίκηλος, περιδείδω, like Lat. per-.

V the notion of double-ness which belongs to ἀμφί is found in only one poetic compd., περιδέξιος (q.v.).

G PROSODY: περί never suffers elision in Il. or Od. ( περ' ἰγνύσι h.Merc. 152
); once in Hes., περίαχε Th. 678
(cf. Q.S.3.601, 11.382), v. ἰάχω fin.; περ' ἰγνύῃσι Theoc.25.242
; περ' Ἠδάλιον Inscr.Cypr. 135.27
H.; also in Pi., περάπτων P.3.52
; περόδοις N.11.40
; περιδαῖος Fr. 154
; περ' αὐτᾶς P.4.265
; ταύτας περ' ἀτλάτου πάθας O.6.38
: not in Trag. (περεβάλοντο, περεσκήνωσεν are ff. ll. in A.Ag. 1147, Eu. 634); in Com. and codd. of Prose writers only in part. of περίειμι ( εἶμι ibo) (q. v.):—π. stands before a word beginning with a vowel in Com., περὶ Ἀθηνῶν, περὶ ἐμοῦ, Ar.Eq. 1005 sq.:—[dialect] Aeol. περρ metri gr., v. A. 5.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > περί
4 metacismus

mĕtăcismus, i, m. [for mytacismus, = mutakismos, from mu], a frequent repetition of the letter M, Mart. Cap. 5, § 514; also the pronunciation of M at the close of a word before a word beginning with a vowel, metacism, Diom. p. 448 P.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > metacismus
5 cominciare

[komin'tʃare]
1. vt

to start, begin

hai cominciato il libro che ti ho prestato? — have you started the book I lent you?

cominciare a fare/col fare — to begin to do/by doing

ha cominciato a ridere — she started to laugh

ha cominciato a piangere — she started crying

2. vi

(aus essere) to start, begin

una parola che comincia per J — a word beginning with J

il film comincia con un'esplosione — the film starts with an explosion

tanto per cominciare — to start with

tanto per cominciare non sappiamo se funzionerà — in the first place we don't know if it'll work

a cominciare da domani — starting (from) tomorrow

cominciamo bene! iro — we're off to a fine start!

Nuovo dizionario Italiano-Inglese > cominciare
6 गव

gava
in comp. before a word beginning with a vowel Pāṇ. 6-1, 123 f. andﾠ ifc. V, 4, 92 and VI, 2, 72 ;

f. ī cf. guru-gavī́, brahma-gavī, brāhmaṇa-, bhilla-, strī-
for gó, a cow, cattle (cf. shaḍ-gavá, dvādaṡa-gavá etc.);
ī) for gó, a cow, cattle ( seeﾠ before);
speech Ṡiṡ. II, 68. ;
- गवराज
- गवाकृति
- गवाक्ष
- गवाक्षक
- गवाक्षित
- गवाक्षिन्
- गवाग्र
- गवाची
- गवाञ्च्
- गवादन
- गवानृत
- गवामृत
- गवायुत
- गवायुस्
- गवार्थम्
- गवार्थे
- गवार्ह
- गवाविक
- गवाशन
- गवाश्व
- गवाह्निक
- गवेन्द्र
- गवेश
- गवेशका
- गवेश्वर
- गवैडक
- गवोद्घ

Sanskrit-English dictionary > गव
7 यकार

ya-kāra
m. the letter orﾠ sound ya, Tprāt.;

-râ̱di-pada n. a word beginning with ya (euphemistically applied to any form of yabh) Kāvyâd.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > यकार
8 אַזאַן

(adj.)

[azan]

Approximate Pronunciation (Northern / Southern) [∙]

such a (used optionally before a word beginning with a vowel)

Yiddish-English dictionary > אַזאַן
9 tout

c black tout, toute [tu, tut]

━━━━━━━━━

1. adjective

2. indefinite pronoun

3. adverb

4. masculine noun

━━━━━━━━━

(masculine plural tous, feminine plural toutes)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque tout fait partie d'une locution comme en tout cas, tout le temps, reportez-vous aussi à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

1. <

   a. ( = entier)

• tout le all the

• toute la all the

• tout le reste all the rest

• il a tout le temps qu'il lui faut he has all the time he needs

• toute la France regardait le match the whole of France was watching the match

• pendant tout le voyage during the whole trip

• il a plu toute la nuit it rained all night

• il a dépensé tout son argent he has spent all his money

• il a passé toutes ses vacances à lire he spent all his holidays reading

► tout le monde everybody everyone

• tout le monde le sait everybody knows

• ils veulent vivre comme tout le monde they want to live like everybody else

• il ne fait jamais comme tout le monde he always has to be different► tout, toute + nom

• il a lu tout Balzac he has read all of Balzac

   b. ( = unique) only

• c'est tout l'effet que ça lui fait that's all the effect it has on him

• c'est là tout le problème that's the whole problem

• pour tout mobilier, il avait un lit et une table the only furniture he had was a bed and a table

   c. (indéfini)

► tout, toute + nom singulier ( = n'importe quel) any

• toute personne susceptible de nous aider any person able to help us

• à tout âge at any age

• pour tout renseignement, téléphoner... for information, ring...► à toute ! (inf) see you later!

► tous les, toutes les + nom pluriel ( = chaque) every ; ( = la totalité des) all the

• tous les jours every day

• tous les deux jours every two days

• tous les 10 mètres every 10 metres

• toutes les trois heures every three hours

• tous les enfants étaient à l'école all the children were at school

• tous les enfants ont besoin d'amour all children need love

• toutes les personnes que nous connaissons all the people that we know

• toutes les fois que je le vois every time I see him

• il avait toutes les raisons d'être mécontent he had every reason to be displeased

• un film tous publics a U film (Brit) a G film (US)► tous, toutes + nombre

• tous les deux both of them

• tous les trois all three of them

• tous deux both of them

2. <

   a. (singulier) everything

• il a tout organisé he organized everything

• on ne peut pas tout faire you can't do everything

• tout va bien everything's fine

• il mange tout et n'importe quoi he eats absolutely everything

• ses enfants mangent de tout her children will eat anything

• il vend de tout he sells everything

• il a tout pour réussir he's got everything going for him

• il a tout pour plaire (inf) he's got nothing going for him

• tout a une fin everything comes to an end

• tout est bien qui finit bien all's well that ends well

• être tout pour qn to be everything to sb

► tout ce qui

• tout ce qui lui appartient everything that belongs to him► tout ce que

• tout ce que je sais, c'est qu'il est parti all I know is that he's gone

• c'est tout ce qu'il m'a dit that's all he told me

• ne croyez pas tout ce qu'il raconte don't believe everything he tells you► tout ce qu'il y a de ( = extrêmement) most

• il a été tout ce qu'il y a de gentil he couldn't have been kinder

• c'était tout ce qu'il y a de chic it was the last word in chic► avoir tout de + nom

• elle a tout d'une star she's every inch a star

• ça a tout d'un canular it's obviously a practical joke

• l'organisation a tout d'une secte the organization is nothing less than a sect► à tout va (inf) [licencier, investir, recruter] like mad (inf) ; [libéralisme, communication, consommation] unbridled

• à l'époque, on construisait à tout va at that time there were buildings going up everywhere► en tout ( = au total) in all

• nous étions 16 en tout there were 16 of us in all

• ça coûte 1 000 € en tout it costs 1,000 euros in all

• leurs programmes politiques s'opposent en tout their political programmes clash in every way► en tout et pour tout all in all

• il lui reste 150 euros en tout et pour tout he only has a total of 150 euros left► et tout (inf) and everything

• avec les vacances et tout, je n'ai pas eu le temps what with the holidays and all (inf), I didn't have time

• j'avais préparé le dîner, fait le ménage et tout et tout I'd made the dinner, done the housework and everything► c'est + tout

• c'est tout that's all

• ce sera tout ? will that be all?

• et ce n'est pas tout ! and that's not all!

• c'est pas tout ça, mais il est tard (inf) all this is very nice, but it's getting late► ce n'est pas tout de

• ce n'est pas tout de faire son métier, il faut le faire bien it's not enough just to do your job, you have to do it well

• ce n'est pas tout d'en parler there's more to it than just talking about it► pour tout dire

• cette idée avait surpris et pour tout dire n'avait pas convaincu this idea surprised everybody and, to be honest, wasn't convincing

c black   b. (pluriel) tous

• toutes ( = l'ensemble des personnes) all

• tous sont arrivés they have all arrived

• il les déteste tous he hates them all

• écoutez bien tous ! listen, all of you!

• tous ensemble all together

• nous avons tous nos défauts we all have our faults

• vous toutes qui m'écoutez all of you who are listening to me

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

✦ The final s of tous is pronounced only when it is a pronoun.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

3. <

   a. ► tout + adjectif ( = très) very ; ( = entièrement) quite

• il est tout étonné he's very surprised

• c'est une toute jeune femme she's a very young woman

• elles étaient toutes contentes they were very pleased

• les toutes premières années the very first years

• c'est tout autre chose that's quite another matter

• c'est tout naturel it's quite natural

• toute petite, elle aimait la campagne as a very small child she liked the country► tout (+ en) + nom

• je suis tout ouïe ! I'm all ears!

• tout en laine all wool

• habillé tout en noir dressed all in black

• un jeu tout en douceur a very delicate style of play

• le jardin est tout en fleurs the garden is a mass of flowers► tout + adverbe

• tout près very near

• tout là-bas right over there

• tout en bas de la colline right at the bottom of the hill

• tout au fond right at the bottom

• tout simplement quite simply

• tout plein de (inf) loads (inf) of

• il est mignon tout plein (inf) he's very sweet

   b. ( = déjà) tout prêt

• tout préparé ready-made

• phrases toutes faites set phrases

• idées toutes faites preconceived ideas

   c. ► tout en + participe présent

• tout en marchant while walking

• je suis incapable de travailler tout en écoutant de la musique I can't work and listen to music at the same time

• tout en prétendant le contraire il voulait être élu although he pretended otherwise he wanted to be elected

   d. (locutions)

► tout à fait quite

• ce n'est pas tout à fait la même chose it's not quite the same thing

• c'est tout à fait faux it's quite wrong

• il est tout à fait charmant he's quite charming

• je suis tout à fait d'accord avec vous I totally agree with you

• vous êtes d'accord ? -- tout à fait ! do you agree? -- absolutely!► tout à l'heure ( = plus tard) later ; ( = peu avant) a short while ago

• je repasserai tout à l'heure I'll come back later

• tout à l'heure tu as dit que... you said earlier that...

• à tout à l'heure ! see you later!► tout de suite straightaway

• j'ai tout de suite compris I understood straightaway

• ce n'est pas pour tout de suite ( = ce n'est pas près d'arriver) it won't happen overnight ; ( = c'est improbable) it's hardly likely to happen

4. <

   a. ( = ensemble) whole

• ces éléments forment un tout these elements make up a whole

• prendre le tout to take all of it (or them)

• jouer le tout pour le tout to stake one's all

• mon tout est un roi de France my whole is a king of France

   b. ( = essentiel) le tout c'est de faire vite the main thing is to be quick about it

• c'est pas le tout mais j'ai du travail (inf) this is all very well but I've got work to do

• ce n'est pas le tout de s'amuser, il faut travailler there's more to life than enjoying yourself, people have got to work

   c. (locutions)

► du tout

• pas du tout ! not at all!

• il n'y a plus du tout de pain there's no bread left at all

• je ne vois rien du tout I can't see a thing► du tout au tout ( = complètement) completely

• il avait changé du tout au tout he had changed completely

* * *
tu
1.

toute tut, mpl tous tu adj, tus pron, fpl toutes tut pronom indéfini

1) tout ( chaque chose) everything; ( n'importe quoi) anything; ( l'ensemble) all

tout est prêt — everything is ready

tout peut arriver — anything can happen

tout est prétexte à querelle(s) — any pretext will do to start a quarrel

tout n'est pas perdu — all is not lost

en tout — ( au total) in all; ( entièrement) in every respect

en tout et pour tout — all told

tout bien compté or pesé or considéré — all in all

tout est là — fig that's the whole point

c'est tout dire — I need say no more

et tout et tout — (colloq) and all that sort of thing

ce n'est pas tout (que) de commencer un travail, il faut le finir — it's not enough ou it's all very well to start off a job, it's got to be finished

avoir tout d'un assassin — to look just like a murderer

2) tous tus, toutes ( la totalité des êtres ou choses) all; (la totalité des éléments d'une catégorie, d'un groupe) all of them/us/you

tous ensemble — all together

tous ne sont pas d'accord — not all of them agree

toutes tant qu'elles sont — all of them, each and every one of them

est-ce que ça conviendra à tous? — will it suit everybody ou everyone?

2.

adjectif

1) ( exprimant la totalité)

bois tout ton lait — drink all your milk, drink up your milk

tout le reste — everything else

manger tout un pain — to eat a whole loaf

tout Pompéi a été enseveli — the whole of Pompeii was buried

je ne l'ai pas vu de tout l'été — I haven't seen him all summer

tout le problème est là — that's where the problem lies

tout cela ne compte pas — none of that counts

tout le monde — everybody

2) ( véritable)

c'est tout un travail/événement — it's quite a job/an event

3) (devant ce qui/que/dont) ( l'ensemble) all; ( toutes les choses) everything; ( sans discrimination) anything

tout ce dont j'ai besoin — all I need

j'ai acheté tout ce qui était sur la liste — I bought everything that was on the list

il dit tout ce qui lui passe par la tête — he says anything that comes into his head

tout ce qu'il dit n'est pas vrai — not all of what he says is true

être tout ce qu'il y a de plus serviable — to be most obliging

c'est tout ce qu'on fait de mieux — it's the best there is

‘tu en es sûr?’ - ‘tout ce qu'il y a de plus sûr’ — ‘are you sure?’ - ‘as sure as can be’

4) ( n'importe quel) any

à tout âge — at any age

à tout moment — ( n'importe quand) at any time; ( sans cesse) constantly

toute publicité est interdite — all advertising is prohibited

5) ( total)

en toute innocence/franchise — in all innocence/honesty

en toute liberté — with complete freedom

en toute hâte — in a great hurry

de toute beauté — most beautiful

6) (unique, seul)

il a souri pour toute réponse — his only reply was a smile, he smiled by way of a reply

on lui donne quelques légumes pour tous gages — all that he gets in the way of wages is a few vegetables

7) tous, toutes ( les uns et les autres sans distinction) all, every (+ sg)

en toutes choses — in all things, in everything

toutes les pages sont déchirées — all the pages are torn, every page is torn

tous les prétextes leur sont bons — they'll use any excuse ( pour to)

meubles tous budgets — furniture to suit every pocket

nous irons tous les deux — both of us will go, we'll both go

je les prends tous les quatre — I'm taking all four (of them)

8) ( chaque) tous/toutes les every

à tous les coins de rue — on every street corner

tous les jours — every day

tous les deux jours — every other day

tous les combien? — how often?

3.

adverbe (normally invariable, but agrees in gender and in number with feminine adjective beginning with consonant or h-aspirate)

1) (très, extrêmement) very, quite; ( entièrement) all

tout doucement — very gently

tout étonnées/toutes honteuses — very surprised/ashamed

tout enfant, elle aimait déjà dessiner — as a small child she already liked to draw

c'est tout naturel — it's quite natural

des yeux tout ronds de surprise — eyes wide with surprise

être tout mouillé/sale — to be all wet/dirty

faire quelque chose tout seul — to do something all by oneself

c'est tout autre chose, c'est une tout autre histoire — it's a different matter altogether

2) ( devant un nom)

c'est tout le portrait de sa mère — she's the spitting ou very image of her mother

c'est tout l'inverse or le contraire — it's the very opposite

ça m'en a tout l'air — it looks very much like it to me

tu as tout le temps d'y réfléchir — you've got plenty of time to think it over

avec toi, c'est tout l'un ou tout l'autre — you see everything in black and white

3) ( tout à fait)

la toute dernière ligne — the very last line

tout à côté de/contre/en haut — right by/against/at the top

il les a mangés tout crus — he ate them raw

j'en sais tout autant que lui — I know just as much as he does

maison tout en longueur — very long and narrow house

ils étaient tout en sang/en sueur — they were covered in blood/bathed in sweat

être tout en larmes — to be in floods of tears

la colline est tout en fleurs — the hill is a mass of flowers

elle est tout(e) à son travail — she's totally absorbed in her work

4) ( d'avance)

tout prêt — ready-made

des légumes tout épluchés — ready-peeled vegetables

5) ( en même temps) while; ( bien que) although

il lisait tout en marchant — he was reading as he walked

elle le défendait tout en le sachant coupable — she defended him although she knew he was guilty

6) (marquant la concession: quoique)

tout aussi étrange que cela paraisse — however strange it may seem

tout malin/roi qu'il est, il... — he may be clever/a king, but he...

7) ( rien d'autre que)

je suis tout ouïe — hum I'm all ears

veste tout cuir — all leather jacket

4.

du tout locution adverbiale

(pas) du tout, (point) du tout — not at all

sans savoir du tout — without knowing at all

5.

nom masculin (pl touts)

1) ( ensemble)

former un tout — to make up ou form a whole

mon tout — ( charade) my whole, my all

du tout au tout — completely

2)

le tout — ( la totalité) the whole lot, the lot; ( l'essentiel) the main thing

vendre le tout pour 50 euros — to sell the (whole) lot for 50 euros

le tout est de réussir — the main ou most important thing is to succeed

ce n'est pas le tout! — (colloq) this is no good!

6.

Tout- (in compounds)

le Tout-Paris/-Londres — the Paris/London smart set

Phrasal Verbs:

- tout à coup

- tout d'un coup

- tout à fait

- tout à l'heure

- tout de même

- tout de suite

••

être tout yeux tout oreilles — to be very attentive

••

Quand tout fait partie d'une locution figée comme tous feux éteints, à tout hasard, de toute(s) part(s), tout compte fait, après tout etc, qu'il est fréquemment associé à un adjectif ou un adverbe donné comme tout nu, tout neuf, tout plein, tout simplement etc, la traduction sera donnée sous le terme principal

Remarques sur l'adjectif

1. Lorsque tout, adjectif singulier, exprime la totalité, plusieurs traductions sont possibles mais non toujours interchangeables. De manière générale

On emploiera all lorsque le mot qualifié est non dénombrable: tout le vin/l'argent = all the wine/the money; tout ce bruit/leur talent = all that noise/their talent; c'est tout ce que je sais = that's all I know

On emploiera the whole si tout peut être remplacé par entier: tout le gâteau/groupe = the whole cake/group

tout un dans le sens de entier se traduit toujours par a whole: tout un livre = a whole book

Mais: connaître tout Zola/le Japon = to know the whole of Zola/Japan; lire tout ‘Les Misérables’ = to read the whole of ‘Les Misérables’; pendant tout mon séjour = for the whole of my stay

Avec certains mots, en particulier les mots désignant la durée ( journée, mois, saison, vie, vacances etc), les collectifs tels que famille, on pourra employer all ou the whole, la seconde traduction étant légèrement plus emphatique: toute ma vie = all my life, the whole of my life

tout le pays/toute la ville = all the country/town ou = the whole country/town lorsque ces mots désignent la population; au sens géographique, seule la deuxième traduction convient

2. throughout (ou all through) signifie du début à la fin, d'un bout à l'autre. On l'emploie souvent pour insister sur la durée ou l'étendue devant un terme singulier ou pluriel qui désigne l'espace de temps ou l'événement pendant lequel un fait a lieu, ou encore le territoire sur lequel il a lieu: pendant tout le match/tous ces mois = throughout the match/those months; la rumeur se répandit dans toute la province = the rumour [BrE] spread throughout the province; faire tout le trajet debout = to stand throughout the journey (ou for the whole journey); il neige sur toute la France = it's snowing throughout France (ou all over France)

Au pluriel, tous, toutes se traduiront par all pour exprimer la totalité, par every pour insister sur les composants d'un ensemble, ou encore par any pour indiquer l'absence de discrimination. On notera que every and any sont suivis du singulier

••

Quand tout fait partie d'une locution figée comme tous feux éteints, à tout hasard, de toute(s) part(s), tout compte fait, après tout etc, qu'il est fréquemment associé à un adjectif ou un adverbe donné comme tout nu, tout neuf, tout plein, tout simplement etc, la traduction sera donnée sous le terme principal

Remarques sur l'adjectif

1. Lorsque tout, adjectif singulier, exprime la totalité, plusieurs traductions sont possibles mais non toujours interchangeables. De manière générale

On emploiera all lorsque le mot qualifié est non dénombrable: tout le vin/l'argent = all the wine/the money; tout ce bruit/leur talent = all that noise/their talent; c'est tout ce que je sais = that's all I know

On emploiera the whole si tout peut être remplacé par entier: tout le gâteau/groupe = the whole cake/group

tout un dans le sens de entier se traduit toujours par a whole: tout un livre = a whole book

Mais: connaître tout Zola/le Japon = to know the whole of Zola/Japan; lire tout ‘Les Misérables’ = to read the whole of ‘Les Misérables’; pendant tout mon séjour = for the whole of my stay

Avec certains mots, en particulier les mots désignant la durée ( journée, mois, saison, vie, vacances etc), les collectifs tels que famille, on pourra employer all ou the whole, la seconde traduction étant légèrement plus emphatique: toute ma vie = all my life, the whole of my life

tout le pays/toute la ville = all the country/town ou = the whole country/town lorsque ces mots désignent la population; au sens géographique, seule la deuxième traduction convient

2. throughout (ou all through) signifie du début à la fin, d'un bout à l'autre. On l'emploie souvent pour insister sur la durée ou l'étendue devant un terme singulier ou pluriel qui désigne l'espace de temps ou l'événement pendant lequel un fait a lieu, ou encore le territoire sur lequel il a lieu: pendant tout le match/tous ces mois = throughout the match/those months; la rumeur se répandit dans toute la province = the rumour [BrE] spread throughout the province; faire tout le trajet debout = to stand throughout the journey (ou for the whole journey); il neige sur toute la France = it's snowing throughout France (ou all over France)

Au pluriel, tous, toutes se traduiront par all pour exprimer la totalité, par every pour insister sur les composants d'un ensemble, ou encore par any pour indiquer l'absence de discrimination. On notera que every and any sont suivis du singulier

* * *
tu, tut tout, -e tous mpl toutes fpl
1. adj

1) (avec article singulier) all

tout le lait — all the milk

tout le livre — the whole book

tout un pain — a whole loaf

toute la journée — all day

toute la nuit — all night, the whole night

tout le temps — all the time, the whole time

tout le monde — everybody

c'est tout le contraire — it's quite the opposite

c'est toute une affaire; c'est toute une histoire — it's quite a business, it's a whole rigmarole

2) (avec article pluriel) (= chaque) every, (idée d'intégralité) all

toutes les filles — all the girls

tous les livres — all the books

tous les jours — every day

toutes les nuits — every night

toutes les fois — every time

toutes les deux semaines — every other week, every two weeks

toutes les trois semaines — every three weeks, every third week

tous les deux jours — every two days

tous les deux; Nous y sommes allés tous les deux. — We both went., Both of us went.

Nous y sommes allés tous les trois. — All three of us went.

Je les ai invités tous les trois. — I invited all three of them.

3) (sans article) (= n'importe quel)

à tout âge — at any age

à toute heure du jour ou de la nuit — at any time of the day or night, (= seul)

pour toute nourriture, il avait... — his only food was..., (= chaque)

de tous côtés; de toutes parts (= de partout) — from everywhere, from every side, (= partout) all around

2. pron

tout — everything

tous; toutes — all

Il a tout fait. — He did everything.

Il a tout organisé. — He organized everything.

Je les vois tous. — I can see them all., I can see all of them.

Je les connais tous. — I know them all., I know all of them.

Nous y sommes tous allés. — We all went., All of us went.

Nous y sommes toutes allées. — We all went., All of us went.

tout ou rien — all or nothing

c'est tout — that's all

tout de...; Elle a tout d'une mère. — She's a real mother., She's a true mother.

en tout — all together, altogether

Ça fait combien en tout? — How much is that altogether?

en tout et pour tout — all in all

tout ce que...; tout ce qu'il sait — all he knows

C'était tout ce qu'il y a de plus chic. — It was the last word in chic., It was the ultimate in chic.

3. nm

un tout — a whole

Ceci forme un tout. — It forms a whole.

le tout — all of it

Je prends le tout. — I'll take it all., I'll take the whole lot.

le tout est de... — the main thing is to...

pas du tout — not at all

du tout au tout — completely

4. adv

1) (= très, complètement) very

tout près; tout à côté — very near

Elle habite tout près. — She lives very near.

le tout premier; la toute première — the very first

tout seul; toute seule — all alone

Il est tout seul. — He's all alone.

Elle est toute seule. — She's all alone.

Il était tout rouge. — He was all red in the face.

Elle était toute rouge. — She was all red in the face.

parler tout bas — to speak very quietly

le livre tout entier — the whole book

l'histoire tout entière — the whole story

tout en haut — right at the top

tout droit — straight ahead

tout de suite — immediately, straight away

2)

tout en... — while...

tout en travaillant — while working

Il a fait son travail tout en chantant. — He sang as he worked., He sang while he worked.

3) (autres locutions)

tout d'abord — first of all

tout à coup; tout d'un coup — suddenly

tout à fait — absolutely

tout à fait! — exactly!

tout de même — all the same

tout simplement — quite simply

tout court; Charles-Henri, pouvez-vous... — Je vous en prie, appelez-moi Charles tout court. — Charles-Henri, could you... — Please, just call me Charles.

communication par internet, mais aussi communication tout court — communication via the internet, but also simply communication

tout à l'heure (passé) — just now, a short while ago

Je l'ai vu tout à l'heure. — I saw him just now., (futur) shortly, in a moment

Je finirai ça tout à l'heure. — I'll finish it in a moment.

à tout à l'heure! — see you later!

* * *

tout ⇒ Note d'usage, toute, mpl tous, fpl toutes

A pron indéf

1 tout ( chaque chose) everything; ( n'importe quoi) anything; ( l'ensemble) all; penser à tout to think of everything; tout est prêt everything is ready; le sucre, les graisses, le sel, tout me fait mal sugar, fat, salt, everything is bad for me; être tout pour qn to be everything to sb; tout peut arriver anything can happen; le chien mange (de) tout the dog will eat anything; tout est prétexte à querelle(s) any pretext will do to start a quarrel; tout n'est pas perdu all is not lost; tout ou rien all or nothing; tout ou partie de qch all or part of sth; tout va bien all's well, everything's fine; en tout ( au total) in all; ( entièrement) in every respect; en tout et pour tout all told; et tout ça parce que/pour and all because/for; tout bien compté or pesé or considéré all in all; tout est là fig that's the whole point; c'est tout dire I need say no more; et tout et tout○ and all that sort of thing; et ce n'est pas tout! and that's not all!; ce n'est pas tout (que) de commencer un travail, il faut le finir it's not enough ou it's all very well to start off a job, it's got to be finished; avoir tout d'un singe/assassin to look just like a monkey/murderer; ⇒ bien, monde, salaire, or;

2 tous, toutes ( la totalité des êtres ou choses) all; (la totalité des éléments d'une catégorie, d'un groupe) all of them/us/you; nous sommes tous des pécheurs we are all sinners; le film n'est pas à la portée de tous the film is not accessible to all; merci à tous thank you all; tous ensemble all together; ce sont tous d'anciens soldats all of them are ou they are all former soldiers; il les a tous cassés he has broken all of them, he's broken them all; il l'a dit devant nous tous he said it in front of all of us; leurs enfants, tous musiciens de talent their children, all of them talented musicians; tous ne sont pas d'accord not all of them agree; toutes tant qu'elles sont all of them, each and every one of them; vous tous qui le connaissez all of you who know him; écoutez-moi tous listen to me, all of you; est-ce que ça conviendra à tous? will it suit everybody ou everyone?

B adj

1 ( exprimant la totalité) bois tout ton lait drink all your milk, drink up your milk; tout le reste est à jeter everything else is to be thrown away; manger tout un pain to eat a whole loaf; tout Pompéi a été enseveli the whole of Pompeii was buried; tout Nice se réjouit the whole of ou all Nice rejoiced; il a plu toute la journée it rained all day (long) ou the whole day; pendant toute une année for a whole year; la semaine se passa toute à attendre the whole ou entire week was spent waiting; j'ai passé tout mon dimanche à travailler I spent the whole of ou all Sunday working; je ne l'ai pas vu de tout l'été I haven't seen him all summer; cet enfant est toute ma vie this child is my whole life; c'est tout le plaisir que tu y trouves? is that all the pleasure ou the only pleasure it gives you?; tout le problème est là that's where the problem lies; tout cela ne compte pas none of that counts; le meilleur dentiste de toute la ville the best dentist in town; tout le monde everybody; ⇒ cœur, monde, temps;

2 ( véritable) c'est tout un travail/événement it's quite a job/an event; il a fait toute une histoire he made a real ou big fuss, he made quite a fuss; c'est tout un art there's a whole art to it;

3 tout ce qui/que/dont ( l'ensemble) all; ( toutes les choses) everything; ( sans discrimination) anything; tout ce qui compte all that matters; c'est tout ce que je fais that's all I do; tout ce dont j'ai besoin all I need; j'ai acheté tout ce qui était sur la liste I bought everything that was on the list; il dit tout ce qui lui passe par la tête he says anything that comes into his head; tout ce qu'il dit n'est pas vrai not all of what he says is true; tout ce que le village compte d'enfants, tout ce qu'il y a d'enfants dans le village all the children in the village; être tout ce qu'il y a de plus serviable to be most obliging; c'est tout ce qu'on fait de mieux it's the best there is; ‘tu en es sûr?’-‘tout ce qu'il y a de plus sûr’ ‘are you sure?’-‘as sure as can be’, ‘absolutely sure’;

4 ( n'importe quel) any; à tout âge at any age; de toute nature of any kind; à toute heure du jour ou de la nuit at all times of the day or night; ‘service à toute heure’ ‘24 hour service’; à tout moment ( n'importe quand) at any time; ( sans cesse) constantly; tout prétexte leur est bon they'll jump at any excuse; toute personne qui anyone ou anybody who; toute autre solution serait rejetée any other solution would be rejected; tout autre que lui/toi aurait abandonné anybody else would have given up; toute publicité est interdite all advertising is prohibited; pour toute réclamation, s'adresser à… all complaints should be addressed to…; tout billet n'est pas valable not all tickets are valid; ⇒ vérité;

5 (sans déterminant: total) en toute innocence/franchise in all innocence/honesty; en toute liberté with complete freedom; donner toute satisfaction to give complete satisfaction; c'est tout bénéfice it's all profit; il aurait tout intérêt à placer cet argent it would be in his best interests to invest this money; partir en toute hâte to leave in a great hurry; un jardin de toute beauté a most beautiful garden; être à toute extrémité to be close to death; ⇒ épreuve, hasard, prix, vitesse;

6 (unique, seul) il a souri pour toute réponse his only reply was a smile, he smiled by way of a reply; on lui donne quelques légumes pour tous gages all that he gets in the way of wages is a few vegetables; elle a un chien pour toute compagnie the only company she has ou all she has for company is a dog;

7 tous, toutes ( les uns et les autres sans distinction) all, every (+ v sg); ceci vaut pour tous les candidats this applies to all candidates ou to every candidate; en tous pays in all countries, in every country; en toutes choses in all things, in everything; toutes les pages sont déchirées all the pages are torn, every page is torn; les lettres ont toutes été signées the letters have all been signed; j'ai toutes les raisons de me plaindre I have every reason to complain; tous les hommes sont mortels all men are mortal; il a fait tous les métiers he's done all sorts of jobs; tous les prétextes leur sont bons they'll use any excuse (pour to); meubles tous budgets furniture to suit every pocket; tous deux se levèrent both of them got up, they both got up; nous irons tous les deux both of us will go, we'll both go; je les prends tous les trois/quatre etc I'm taking all three/four etc (of them);

8 ( chaque) tous/toutes les every; à tous les coins de rue on every street corner; saisir toutes les occasions to seize every opportunity; tous les jours/mois/ans every day/month/year; tous les quarts d'heure/10 mètres every quarter of an hour/10 metres; un cachet toutes les quatre heures one tablet every four hours; tous les deux jours/mois every other day/month; tous les combien? how often?

C adv (normally invariable, but agrees in gender and in number with feminine adjective beginning with consonant or h-aspirate)

1 (très, extrêmement) very, quite; ( entièrement) all; tout doucement very gently; ils sont tout contents they are very happy; elles sont tout étonnées/toutes honteuses they are very surprised/ashamed; être tout excité to be very ou all excited; être tout jeune/petit to be very young/small; tout enfant, elle aimait déjà dessiner as a small child she already liked to draw; c'est tout naturel it's quite natural; des yeux tout ronds de surprise eyes wide with surprise; être tout mouillé/sale to be all wet/dirty; tout seul dans la vie all alone in life; faire qch tout seul to do sth all by oneself; c'est tout autre chose, c'est une tout autre histoire it's a different matter altogether;

2 ( devant un nom) c'est tout le portrait de sa mère she's the spitting ou very image of her mother; c'est tout l'inverse or le contraire it's the very opposite; ça m'en a tout l'air it looks very much like it to me; tu as tout le temps d'y réfléchir you've got plenty of time to think it over; avec toi, c'est tout l'un ou tout l'autre you see everything in black and white;

3 ( tout à fait) la toute dernière ligne the very last line; les tout premiers fruits de l'été the very first fruits of summer; j'habite tout près I live very close by ou very near; tout près de very close to, very near; tout à côté de/contre/en haut right by/against/at the top; il les a mangés tout crus he ate them raw; un gâteau tout entier a whole cake; j'en sais tout autant que lui I know just as much as he does; c'est tout aussi cher it's just as expensive; vêtue tout de noir, tout de noir vêtue dressed all in black; maison tout en longueur very long and narrow house; un jeu tout en finesse a very subtle game; une semaine toute de fatigue a very tiring week; une vie toute de soucis a life full of worry; ils étaient tout en sang/en sueur they were covered in blood/bathed in sweat; être tout en larmes to be in floods of tears; la colline est tout en fleurs the hill is a mass of flowers; elle est tout(e) à son travail she's totally absorbed in her work;

4 ( d'avance) tout prêt ready-made; sauces/idées toutes faites ready-made sauces/ideas; des légumes tout épluchés ready-peeled vegetables; ⇒ cuit, vu;

5 ( en même temps) while; ( bien que) although; il lisait tout en marchant he was reading as he walked; elle le défendait tout en le sachant coupable she defended him although she knew he was guilty; ⇒ en;

6 (marquant la concession: quoique) tout aussi étrange que cela paraisse however strange it may seem; tout prudemment que l'on conduise however carefully one drives; tout malins qu'ils sont, ils… clever though they may be, they…, they may be clever, but they…; toute reine qu'elle est, elle ne peut pas faire ça she may be a queen, but she can't do that;

7 ( rien d'autre que) être tout énergie/muscle to be all energy/muscle; être tout sourires to be all smiles; je suis tout ouïe hum I'm all ears; veste tout cuir/laine all leather/wool jacket; ⇒ feu, sucre.

D du tout loc adv pas du tout, point du tout liter not at all; sans savoir du tout without knowing at all; je ne le vois plus du tout I don't see him at all now; il ne m'en reste plus du tout I have none left at all; crois-tu qu'il m'ait remercié? du tout! do you think he thanked me? not at all!

E nm (pl touts)

1 ( ensemble) former un tout to make up ou form a whole; mon tout ( charade) my whole, my all; du tout au tout completely;

2 le tout ( la totalité) the whole lot, the lot; ( l'essentiel) the main thing; vendre le tout pour 200 euros to sell the (whole) lot for 200 euros; le tout est de réussir/qu'il réussisse the main ou most important thing is to succeed/that he should succeed; le Grand Tout Relig the Great Whole; ce n'est pas le tout○! this is no good!

F tout- ( in compounds) le Tout-Paris/-Londres the Paris/London smart set.

Composés

tout à coup suddenly; tout d'un coup ( soudain) suddenly; ( à la fois) all at once; tout à fait ( entièrement) quite, absolutely; ce n'est pas tout à fait vrai/pareil it's not quite true/the same thing; c'est tout à fait vrai it's quite ou absolutely true; ‘tu es d'accord?’-‘tout à fait’ ‘do you agree?’-‘absolutely’; il est tout à fait charmant he's absolutely ou perfectly charming; être tout à fait pour/contre to be totally for/against; tout à l'heure ( bientôt) in a moment; ( peu avant) a little while ago, just now; à tout à l'heure! see you later!; tout de même ( quand même) all the same, even so; ( indigné) tout de même! really!, honestly!; ( vraiment) quite; tu aurais tout de même pu faire attention! all the same ou even so you might have been careful!; c'est tout de même un peu fort! really ou honestly, it's a bit much!; c'est tout de même bizarre que it's quite strange that; tout de suite at once, straight away; ce n'est pas pour tout de suite ( ce n'est pas pressé) there's no rush; ( ce sera long) it's going to take some time.

Idiomes

tout est bien qui finit bien all's well that ends well; être tout yeux tout oreilles to be very attentive.

[tu, devant voyelle ou h muet tut ] ( féminin toute [tut], pluriel masculin tous [ adjectif tu, pronom tus], pluriel féminin toutes [tut]) adjectif qualificatif (au singulier)

1. [entier] all (the), the whole (of the)

toute la nuit all night

elle a parcouru toute la distance en 2 heures she covered the full distance in 2 hours

il se plaint toute la journée he complains all the time ou the whole day long

tout le village a participé the whole village took part

toute une journée a whole day

tout ceci/cela all (of) this/that

tout ce travail pour rien! all this work for nothing!

j'ai tout mon temps I've plenty of time ou all the time in the world

toute ma fortune my whole fortune

ils se sont aimés toute leur vie they loved each other all their lives

avec lui, c'est tout l'un ou tout l'autre with him, it's either (all) black or (all) white

2. [devant un nom propre] all

j'ai visité tout Paris en huit jours I saw all ou the whole of Paris in a week

3. [devant un nom sans article]

on a tout intérêt à y aller it's in our every interest to go

c'est en toute liberté que j'ai choisi I made the choice completely of my own free will

rouler à toute vitesse to drive at full ou top speed

en toute franchise/simplicité in all sincerity/simplicity

c'est de toute beauté it's extremely beautiful

4. [avec une valeur emphatique]

c'est toute une affaire! it's quite a to-do!

c'est toute une expédition pour y aller! getting there involves quite a trek!

5. (comme adverbe) [entièrement] completely

elle était toute à son travail she was completely absorbed in her work

6. [unique, seul] only

c'est tout l'effet que ça te fait? is that all it means to you?

ma fille est tout mon bonheur my daughter is my sole ou only source of happiness

pour tout remerciement on m'a renvoyé by way of thanks I got fired

pour toute famille il n'avait qu'une cousine éloignée one distant cousin was all the family he had

7. [suivi d'une relative]

tout ce qu'on dit everything people say

tout ce qui me gêne, c'est la différence d'âge the only thing ou all I'm worried about is the age difference

tout ce que l'entreprise compte de personnel qualifié the company's entire qualified workforce

ils s'amusaient tout ce qu'ils savaient they were having a whale of a time

tout ce qu'il y a de: ses enfants sont tout ce qu'il y a de bien élevés his children are very well-behaved ou are models of good behaviour

ce projet est tout ce qu'il y a de plus sérieux this project couldn't be more serious

————————

[tu, devant voyelle ou h muet tut ] ( féminin toute [tut], pluriel masculin tous [ adjectif tu, pronom tus], pluriel féminin toutes [tut]) déterminant (adjectif indéfini)

A.[AU SINGULIER] [chaque, n'importe quel] any, all, every

tout citoyen a des droits every citizen has rights, all citizens have rights

toute personne ayant vu l'accident any person who witnessed the accident

tout changement les inquiète the slightest change worries them

pour tout renseignement, écrivez-nous for further information, write to us

à tout âge at any age

à toute heure du jour et de la nuit at any hour of the day or night

de tout temps since time immemorial, from the beginning of time

en tout temps throughout ou all through history

tout autre anybody else

tout autre que lui aurait refusé anyone other than him ou anybody else would have refused

toute peine mérite salaire (proverbe) the labourer is worthy of his hire (proverb)

B.[AU PLURIEL]

1. [exprimant la totalité] all

tous les hommes all men, the whole of mankind

tous les gens everybody, everyone

je veux tous les détails I want all the details ou the full details

ça se vend maintenant à tous les coins de rue it's now sold on every street corner

2. [devant un nom sans article]

ils étaient 150 000, toutes disciplines/races confondues there were 150,000 of them, taking all disciplines/races together

champion toutes catégories overall champion

il roulait tous feux éteints he was driving with his lights off

je dois le rencontrer toutes affaires cessantes I must meet him forthwith

il est mon préféré à tous égards I like him best in every respect

3. [exprimant la périodicité] every

tous les jours every day

toutes les deux semaines every other week, every second week, every two weeks

à prendre toutes les quatre heures to be taken every four hours ou at four-hourly intervals

toutes les fois qu'on s'est rencontrés every time we've met

————————

[tu, devant voyelle ou h muet tut ] ( féminin toute [tut], pluriel masculin tous [ adjectif tu, pronom tus], pluriel féminin toutes [tut]) pronom indéfini

A.[AU SINGULIER] everything, all

[n'importe quoi] anything

j'ai tout jeté I threw everything away

dis-moi tout tell me all about it

t'as tout compris! (familier) that's it!, that's right!

c'est tout dire that says it all

il mange de tout he eats anything

il est prêt à tout he's ready for anything

capable de tout capable of anything

c'est tout that's all

ce sera tout? [dans un magasin] will be that all?, anything else?

ce n'est pas tout that's not all

ce n'est pas tout de faire des enfants, il faut les élever ensuite having children is one thing, but then you've got to bring them up

être tout pour quelqu'un to be everything for somebody, to mean everything to somebody

et tout et tout (familier) and all that (sort of thing)

on aura tout vu! now I've ou we've seen everything!

tout est là

a. [objets] that's everything

b. [problème] that's the whole point ou the crux of the matter

vous serez remboursé tout ou partie you'll get all or part of your money back

avec toi c'est tout ou rien with you, it's all or nothing ou one extreme or the other

c'est tout sauf du foie gras it's anything but foie gras

il est tout sauf un génie call him anything but not a genius

tout se passe comme si... it's as though...

à tout faire [produit] all-purpose

tout bien considéré, tout bien réfléchi all things considered

tout bien pesé after weighing up the pros and the cons

il a tout de son père he's every bit like his father

B.[AU PLURIEL]

1. [désignant ce dont on a parlé]

il y a plusieurs points de vue, tous sont intéressants there are several points of view, they are all interesting

j'adore les prunes — prends-les toutes I love plums — take them all ou all of them

2. [avec une valeur récapitulative] all

Jean, Pierre, Jacques, tous voulaient la voir Jean, Pierre, Jacques, they all wanted to see her

c'est tous feignants et compagnie! (familier) they're just a bunch of idlers!

3. [tout le monde]

vous m'entendez tous? can you all hear me?

à vous tous qui m'avez aidé, merci to all of you who helped me, thank you

des émissions pour tous programmes suitable for all (audiences)

tous ensemble all together

tous tant ou autant que nous sommes all of us, every (single) one of us

tout ( féminin toute, pluriel féminin toutes) adverbe (s'accorde en genre et en nombre devant un adjectif féminin commençant par une consonne ou un h aspiré)

1. [entièrement, tout à fait] quite, very, completely

ils étaient tout seuls they were quite ou completely alone

la ville tout entière the whole town

tout neuf brand new

tout nu stark naked

tout cru (totally) raw

un tout jeune homme a very young man

sa chevelure était toute hérissée his/her hair was all messy

ses tout premiers mots his/her very first words

les tout premiers temps at the very beginning

une robe tout en dentelle a dress made of lace

le jardin est tout en longueur the garden is just one long strip

un de nos tout meilleurs acteurs one of our very best actors

tout mouillé wet ou soaked through, drenched

être tout occupé à faire quelque chose to be very busy doing something

je t'aime tout autant qu'autrefois I love you just as much as I did before

tout simplement/autrement quite simply/differently

téléphone-moi, tout simplement just phone me, that's the easiest (way)

une toile tout coton a 100% cotton cloth, an all cotton material

il est toute bonté/générosité he is goodness/generosity itself

ça, c'est tout lui! that's typical of him ou just like him!

2. [en intensif]

tout en haut/bas right at the top/bottom

c'est tout près it's very close

tout à côté de moi right next to me

tout contre le mur right up against the wall

c'est tout le contraire! it's quite the opposite!

3. [déjà]

tout prêt ou préparé ready-made

tout bébé, elle dansait déjà even as a baby, she was already dancing

on verra — c'est tout vu! we'll see — it's already decided!

4. (avec un gérondif) [indiquant la simultanéité]

on mangera tout en marchant we'll eat while we're walking

[indiquant la concession]

tout en avouant son ignorance dans ce domaine, il continuait à me contredire although he'd confessed his ignorance in that field, he kept on contradicting me

tout nom masculin

1. [ensemble] whole

former un tout to make up a whole

mon tout est un instrument de musique [dans une charade] my whole ou all is a musical instrument

2. [l'essentiel]

le tout the main ou the most important thing

le tout c'est de ne pas bafouiller the most important thing is not to stutter

ce n'est pas le tout, mais je dois partir (familier) that's all very well, but I've got to go now

ce n'est pas le tout de critiquer, il faut pouvoir proposer autre chose it's not enough to criticize, you've got to be able to suggest something else

jouer ou risquer le tout pour le tout to risk (one's) all

tenter le tout pour le tout to make a (final) desperate attempt ou a last ditch effort

c'est un tout it's all the same, it makes no difference

à quand le tout informatique? when will everything be computerized?

la politique du tout ou rien an all-or-nothing policy

changer du tout au tout to change completely

————————

du tout locution adverbiale

not at all

je vous dérange? — du tout, du tout! am I disturbing you? — not at all ou not in the least!

elle finissait son café sans du tout se soucier de notre présence she was finishing her coffee without paying any attention to us at all ou whatsoever

————————

en tout locution adverbiale

1. [au total] in total, in all

cela fait 95 euros en tout that comes to 95 euros in all ou in total

2. [exactement] exactly, entirely

la copie est conforme en tout à l'original the copy matches the original exactly

en tout et pour tout locution adverbiale

(all) in all

en tout et pour tout, nous avons dépensé 300 euros all in all, we've spent 300 euros

tout à coup locution adverbiale

all of a sudden, suddenly

tout à fait locution adverbiale

1. [complètement] quite, fully, absolutely

en es-tu tout à fait conscient? are you fully aware of it?

je vous comprends tout à fait I understand you perfectly well

ce n'est pas tout à fait exact it's not quite correct

n'ai-je pas raison? — tout à fait! am I right? — absolutely!

2. [exactement] exactly

c'est tout à fait ce que je cherche/le même it's exactly what I've been looking for/the same

3. [oui] certainly

vous faites les retouches? — tout à fait do you do alterations? — certainly (we do)

————————

tout de même locution adverbiale

1. [malgré tout] all the same, even so

j'irai tout de même all the same, I'll still go

2. [en intensif]

tout de même, tu exagères! steady on!, that's a bit much!

————————

tout de suite locution adverbiale

1. [dans le temps] straight away, right away, at once

apporte du pain — tout de suite! bring some bread — right away!

2. [dans l'espace] immediately

tournez à gauche tout de suite après le pont turn left immediately after the bridge

————————

tout... que locution conjonctive

tout directeur qu'il est ou qu'il soit,... he may well be the boss,...

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > tout

10 महा _mahā

1
महा A cow.

2

महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)

-Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.

-अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.

-(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.

-2 a kind of rat.

-3 N. of Śiva.

-अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.

-अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.

-अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.

-अध्वरः a great sacrifice.

-अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.

-2 cooking utensils. (

-सी) a kitchen-maid. (

-सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.

-अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.

-अनुभाव a.

1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.

-2 virtuous, righteous, just.

(-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.

-2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.

-अन्तकः 1 death.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.

-2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.

-अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.

-अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (

-यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.

-अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.

-अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).

-अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.

-अम्बुजम् a billion.

-अम्ल a. very sour. (

-म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.

-अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (

-र्घः) a kind of quail.

-अर्घ्य a.

1 valuable, precious.

-2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.

-अर्चिस् a. flaming high.

-अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.

-2 N. of Śiva.

-अर्थ a.

1 rich.

-2 great, noble, dignified.

-3 important, weighty.

-4 significant.

-अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.

-अर्ह a.

1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.

-2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (

-र्हम्) white sandal-wood.

-अवरोहः the fig-tree.

-अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.

- अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.

-अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.

-अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......

-असिः a large sword.

-असुरी N. of Durgā.

-अह्नः the afternoon.

-आकार a. extensive, large, great.

-आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (

-ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.

-आत्मन् a.

1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.

-2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.

-3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)

1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.

-2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).

-आनकः a kind of large drum.

-आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.

-2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.

(-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.

-2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.

-आपगा a great river.

-आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.

-आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (

-म्भः) any great enterprize.

-आलयः 1 a temple in general.

-2 a sanctuary, an asylum.

-3 a great dwelling.

-4 a place of pilgrimage.

-5 the world of Brahman.

-6 the Supreme Spirit.

-7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.

-8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.

-9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (

-या) N. of a particular deity.

- आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.

(-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.

-2 the ocean.

-आस्पद a.

1 occupying a great position.

-2 mighty, powerful.

-आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.

-इच्छ a.

1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.

-2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.

-इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.

-2 a chief or leader in general.

-3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.

-इभ्य a. very rich.

-इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.

-इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.

-ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.

-ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.

-ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.

-2 N. of Śiva.

-3 of Viṣṇu.

-4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).

-5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.

(-री) 1 N. of Durgā.

-2 a kind of bell-metal.

-उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.

-उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (

-लः) the Sārasa bird.

-उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.

-2 the god of love.

-उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.

(-हः) 1 perseverance.

-2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.

-उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.

-2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.

- उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.

(-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.

-2 final beatitude.

-3 a lord, master.

-4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.

-5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.

-6 sour milk mixed with honey.

-7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).

- उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.

-(रम्) 1 a big belly.

-2 dropsy.

-उदार a.

1 very generous or magnanimous.

-2 mighty, powerful.

-उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.

-उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.

-उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).

-उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (

-तः) the palmyra tree.

-उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.

-उपकारः a great obligation.

-उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.

-उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.

-उरस्क a. broad-chested. (

-स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.

-उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.

-उल्का 1 a great meteor.

-2 a great fire-brand.

-ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.

-ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.

-ऋषभः a great bull.

-ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').

-2 N. of Sacute;iva.

-3 of Buddha.

-ओघ a. having a strong current.

-घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.

-ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (

-ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.

-ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.

-ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (

-सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).

-ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).

-ओषधिः f.

1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.

-2 the Dūrvā grass.

-3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....

-औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.

-2 ginger.

-3 garlic.

-4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).

-कच्छः 1 the sea.

-2 N. of Varuṇa.

-3 a mountain.

-कन्दः garlic.

-कपर्दः a kind of shell.

-कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.

-2 red garlic.

-कम्बु a. stark naked. (

-म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.

-कर a.

1 large-handed.

-2 having a large revenue.

-कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.

-कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.

-कला the night of the new moon.

-कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.

-कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.

-2 an epithet of Śukra.

-कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).

-कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (

-ता) the earth.

-काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.

(-यः) 1 an elephant.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-3 of Viṣṇu.

-4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).

-कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.

-कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.

-कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.

-2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.

-3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-4 N. of a kind of gourd.

-5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.

-काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.

-काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).

-कीर्तनम् a house.

-कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.

-कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (

-लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.

-कुहः a species of parasitical worm.

-कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.

-केतुः N. of Śiva.

-केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.

-2 a large sheath.

-क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.

-क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.

-क्षत्रपः a great satrap.

-क्षीरः sugar-cane.

-क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.

-खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).

-गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.

-गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.

-गदः fever.

-गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (

-न्धः) a kind of cane. (

-न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (

-न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.

-गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.

-गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.

-गल a. longnecked.

-गवः Bos gavaeus.

-गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (

-णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.

-गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).

-गुल्मा the Soma plant.

-गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.

-ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.

-2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.

-ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.

-ग्रीवः 1 a camel.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-ग्रीविन् m. a camel.

-घूर्णा spirituous liquor.

-घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).

-घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (

-षम्) a market, fair. (

-षः) a loud noise, clamour.

-चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.

-चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.

-चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.

-चपला a kind of metre.

-चमूः f. a large army.

-छायः the fig-tree.

-जङ्घः a camel.

-जटः an epithet of Śiva.

-जटा 1 a great braid of hair.

-2 the matted hair of Śiva.

-जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (

-त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.

-जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.

-2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.

-3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.

-4 the chief of a caste or trade.

-5 a merchant, tradesman.

-जवः an antelope.

-जातीय a.

1 rather large.

-2 of an excellent kind.

-जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)

-जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.

-ज्ञानिन् m.

1 a very learned man.

-2 a great sage.

-3 N. of Śiva.

-ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.

-ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.

-ज्वरः great affliction.

-ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.

(-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.

-2 a sacrificial fire.

-डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).

-तपस् m.

1 a great ascetic.

-2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.

-तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.

-तिक्तः the Nimba tree.

-तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.

-तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (

-क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.

-तेजस् a.

1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.

-2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)

1 a hero, warrior.

-2 fire.

-3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.

-त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.

-दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.

-दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-दण्डः 1 a long arm.

-2 a severe punishment.

-दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.

-दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.

-दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.

-दारु n. the devadāru tree.

-दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.

-दूषकः a kind of grain.

-देवः N. of Śiva.

(-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.

-2 the chief queen.

-द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.

-द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.

-धन a.

1 rich.

-2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.

(-नम्) 1 gold.

-2 incense.

-3 a costly or rich dress.

-4 agriculture, husbandry.

-5 anything costly or precious.

-6 great booty.

-7 a great battle (Ved.).

-धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.

-धातुः 1 gold.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-3 lymph.

-4 N. of Meru.

-धी a. having a great understanding.

-धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.

-ध्वजः a camel.

-ध्वनिक a. dead.

-नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.

-नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.

-नदः a great river.

-नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.

-2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.

-नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.

-2 N. of a river.

-3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....

-नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.

-नलः a kind of reed.

-नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.

-नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥

-नाडी sinew, tendon.

-नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.

-2 a great drum.

-3 a thunder-cloud.

-4 a shell.

-5 an elephant.

-6 a lion.

-7 the ear.

-8 a camel.

-9 an epithet of Śiva. (

-दम्) a musical instrument.

-नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.

-2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.

-नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.

-2 a great head or chief.

-नासः an epithet of Śiva.

-निद्र a. fast asleep. (

-द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.

-निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.

-नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).

-निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्

-2 an epithet of Durgā.

-नीचः a washerman.

-नील a. dark-blue. (

-लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.

-नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.

-नेमिः a crow.

-न्यायः the chief rule.

-पक्ष a.

1 having many adherents.

-2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.

(-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.

-2 a kind of duck. (

-क्षी) an owl.

-पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.

-पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥

-पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥

-पटः the skin.

-पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.

-2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.

-3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.

-4 an epithet of Śiva.

-5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.

-6 the way to heaven.

-7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.

-पथिक a.

1 undertaking great journeys.

-2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)

-पद्मः 1 a particular high number.

-2 N. of Nārada.

-3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.

-4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.

-5 an epithet of Nanda.

-6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.

(-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.

-2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.

-पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.

-पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.

-पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.

-पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.

-पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.

-2 any great sin or transgression.

-पात्रः a prime minister.

-पादः an epithet of Śiva.

-पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.

-पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.

-पुंसः a great man.

-पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.

-2 the Supreme Spirit.

-3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.

-पुष्पः a kind of worm.

-पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.

-पृष्ठः a camel.

-पोटगलः a kind of large reed.

-प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.

-प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.

-प्रपञ्चः the great universe.

-प्रभ a. of great lustre. (

-भः) the light of a lamp.

-प्रभुः 1 a great lord.

-2 a king, sovereign.

-3 a chief.

-4 an epithet of Indra.

-5 of Śiva

-6 of Viṣṇu.

-7 a great saint or holy man.

-प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.

-प्रश्नः a knotty question.

-प्रसादः 1 a great favour.

-2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः

-प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.

-2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.

-प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.

-2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.

-3 a raven.

-प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.

-प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.

-प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.

-फल a.

1 bearing much fruit.

-2 bringing much reward.

(-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.

-2 a kind of spear.

(-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.

-2 a testicle.

-फेना the cuttle-fish bone.

-बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.

-बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.

-बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām

(-लः) 1 wind, storm.

-2 a Buddha.

-3 a solid bamboo.

-4 a palm.

-5 a crocodile.

-बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (

-लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.

-बाध a. causing great pain or damage.

-बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (

-हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.

-2 the heart.

-3 a water-jar, pitcher.

-4 a hole, cave.

-बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.

-बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.

-बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.

-बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).

-बुशः barley.

-बृहती a kind of metre.

-बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.

-2 a Buddha.

-ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.

-ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.

-2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.

-भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.

-भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.

-भाग a.

1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.

-2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.

-3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.

-भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.

-2 great excel- lence or merit.

-भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (

-तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.

-भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.

-भाण्डम् a chief treasury.

-भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते

-भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.

-2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.

-भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.

-भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).

-भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.

-भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.

-भुज a. long-armed, powerful.

-भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.

(-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.

-2 a great creature.

-भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.

-2 a great coil or hood; great winding.

-3 a serpent. (

-गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.

-मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.

-2 N. of Śiva.

-मति a.

1 high-minded.

-2 clever. (

-तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.

-मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.

-मद a. greatly intoxicated. (

-दः) an elephant in rut.

-मनस्, -मनस्क a.

1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.

-2 liberal.

-3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.

-मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.

-2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.

-मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.

-मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.

-मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.

-महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.

-महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).

-महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.

-2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.

-मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).

-माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.

-मात्र a.

1 great in measure, very great or large.

-2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.

(-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.

-2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.

-3 a superintendent of elephants.

(-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.

-2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.

-मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.

-मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.

-मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.

-2 of Viṣṇu.

-माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.

-2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.

-मायूरम् a particular drug. (

-री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.

-मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.

-2 an epithet of Durgā.

-मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.

-मालः N. of Śiva.

-माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.

-मुखः a crocodile.

-मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).

-मुनिः 1 a great sage.

-2 N. of Vyāsa.

-3 an epithet of Buddha.

-4 of Agastya.

-5 the coriander plant. (

-नि n.)

1 coriander seed.

-2 any medicinal herb or drug.

-मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.

-मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.

-मूलम् a large radish. (

-लः) a kind of onion.

-मूल्य a. very costly. (

-ल्यः) a ruby.

-मृगः 1 any large animal.

-2 an elephant,

-3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.

-मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.

-मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.

-मृधम् a great battle.

-मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.

-मेधा an epithet of Durgā.

-मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (

-हा) an epithet of Durgā.

-यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).

-2 N. of Viṣṇu.

-यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.

-यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.

-यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.

-यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).

-याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.

-युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.

-योगिन् m.

1 an epithet of Śiva.

-2 of Viṣṇu.

-3 a cock.

-योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.

-रक्तम् coral.

-रङ्गः a large stage.

-रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.

-2 the thorn-apple.

-रजनम् 1 safflower.

-2 gold.

-3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.

-रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.

-रथः 1 a great chariot.

-2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).

-3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.

-रवः a frog.

-रस a. very savoury.

(-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.

-2 quicksilver.

-3 a precious mineral.

-4 the fruit of the date tree.

-5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (

-सम्) sour ricewater.

-राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.

-2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.

-3 a deified Jaina teacher.

-4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.

-राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.

-राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).

-राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.

-राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.

-2 N. of Durgā.

-रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.

-रात्रिः, -त्री f.

1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.

-2 midnight.

-3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.

-राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.

-2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (

-ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.

-रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.

-रुज्, -ज a. very painful.

-रुद्रः a form of Śiva.

-रुरुः a species of antelope.

-रूप a. mighty in form.

(-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.

-2 resin.

-रूपकम् a kind of drama.

-रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.

-रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).

-रौद्र a. very dreadful. (

-द्री) an epithet of Durgā.

-रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.

-लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.

-2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.

-लयः 1 a great world destruction.

-2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).

-लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (

-ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.

-लोलः a crow.

-लोहम् a magnet.

-वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).

-वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.

-वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.

-वरा Dūrvā grass.

-वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.

-वर्तनम् high wages;

-वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.

-2 a large creeping plant.

-वसः the porpoise.

-वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.

-वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.

-2 any continuous composition or literary work.

-3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.

-4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.

-वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.

-वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.

-वायुः 1 air (as an element).

-2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.

-वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.

-विडम् a kind of factitious salt.

-विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.

-विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥

-विपुला a kind of metre.

-विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.

-विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.

-विषः a serpent having two mouths.

-विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).

-विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.

-वीचिः N. of a hell.

-वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.

-2 a lion.

-3 the thunderbolt of Indra.

-4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-5 of Garuḍa.

-6 of Hanumat.

-7 a cuckoo.

-8 a white horse.

-9 a sacrificial fire.

-1 a sacrificial vessel.

-11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.

-वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.

(-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.

-2 the Supreme Being. (

-र्या) the wild cotton shrub.

-2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.

-वृषः a great bull.

-वेग a.

1 very swift or fleet.

(-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.

-2 an ape.

-3 the bird Garuḍa.

-वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).

-वेल a. billowy.

-व्याधिः f.

1 a great disease.

-2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).

-व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.

-व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.

(-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).

-2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.

-व्रतिन् m.

1 a devotee, an ascetic.

-2 an epithet of Śiva.

-शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.

-2 of Kārtikeya.

-शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.

-शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.

-2 the temporal bone, forehead.

-3 a human bone.

-4 a particular high number.

-5 one of Kubera's treasures.

-शठः a kind of thorn-apple.

-शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.

-शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.

-शालः a great householder.

-शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.

-शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.

-शासन a.

1 exercising great power.

-2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.

(-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.

-2 great order of government.

-शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.

-शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,

-शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.

-शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.

-शुभ्रम् silver.

-शूद्रः (-द्री f.)

1 a Sūdra in a high position.

-2 a cowherd.

-3 an upper servant. (

-द्री) a female cow-keeper. (

-द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.

-शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.

-शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.

-2 the शरभ animal.

-श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.

-श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).

-श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.

-2 a Jain monk.

-श्लक्ष्णा sand.

-श्वासः a kind of asthma.

-श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.

-2 of Durgā.

-3 white sugar.

-संहिता great combi- nation.

-संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.

-सती a very chaste woman.

-सत्ता absolute existence.

-सत्यः an epithet of Yama.

-सत्त्व a.

1 noble.

-2 very strong or powerful.

-3 just, righteous.

(-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.

-2 N. of Sākyamuni.

-3 an epithet of Kubera.

-संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.

-सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.

-सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.

-समुद्रः the great ocean.

-सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).

-सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.

-साधनभागः a great executive officer.

-सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.

-सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.

-सामन्तः a great vassal.

-सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.

-सारः a kind of Khadira tree.

-सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.

-साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.

-साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.

-सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.

-सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.

-सुखम् 1 great pleasure.

-2 copulation. (

-खः) a Buddha.

-सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.

-सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.

-सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.

-सुभिक्षम् good times.

-सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.

-सूक्ष्मा sand.

-सूतः a mili- tary drum.

-सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.

-2 the commander of a large army. (

-ना) a great army.

-स्कन्धः a camel.

-स्थली the earth.

-स्थानम् a great position.

-स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.

-स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.

-स्रोतस् n. the bowels.

-स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.

-स्वनः a kind of drum.

-हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.

-हविस् n. clarified butter.

-हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.

-हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.

-हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.

-ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

11 an

1.
ăn, conj. [etym. very obscure; v. the various views adduced in Hand, I. p. 296, with which he seems dissatisfied; if it is connected with the Sanscr. anjas, = Germ. ander, = Engl. other, we may comp. the Engl. other and or with the Germ. oder, = or]. It introduces the second part of a disjunctive interrogation, or a phrase implying doubt, and thus unites in itself the signif. of aut and num or -ne, or, or whether (hence the clause with an is entirely parallel with that introduced by num, utrum, -ne, etc., while aut forms only a subdivision in the single disjunctive clause; utrum... aut—an... aut, whether... or, etc.; cf. Ochsn. Eclog. p. 150; v. also aut).
I.
In disjunctive interrogations.
A.
Direct.
a.
Introd. by utrum (in Engl. the introd. particle whether is now obsolete, and the interrogation is denoted simply by the order of the words):
Utrum hac me feriam an ab laevā latus?
Plaut. Cist. 3, 10:
sed utrum tu amicis hodie an inimicis tuis Daturu's cenam?
id. Ps. 3, 2, 88; id. Pers. 3, 1, 13; id. Trin. 1, 2, 138; id. Cas. 2, 4, 11:
Utrum sit annon voltis?
id. Am. prol. 56:
quid facies? Utrum hoc tantum crimen praetermittes an obicies?
Cic. Div. in Caecil. 30 sq.:
in plebem vero Romanam utrum superbiam prius commemorem an crudelitatem?
id. Verr. 1, 122; id. Deiot. 23; id. Fam. 7, 13:
Utrum enim defenditis an impugnatis plebem?
Liv. 5, 3. —And with an twice:
Utrum hoc signum cupiditatis tuae an tropaeum necessitudinis atque hospitii an amoris indicium esse voluisti?
Cic. Verr. 2, 115; id. Imp. Pomp. 57 sq.; id. Rab. 21.—With an three times:
Utrum res ab initio ita ducta est, an ad extremum ita perducta, an ita parva est pecunia, an is (homo) Verres, ut haec quae dixi, gratis facta esse videantur?
Cic. Verr. 2, 61; 3, 83; id. Clu. 183; Liv. 21, 10; and seven times in Cic. Dom. 56-58.—With -ne pleon. (not to be confounded with cases where utrum precedes as pron.; as Cic. Tusc. 4, 4, 9):
sed utrum tu masne an femina es, qui illum patrem voces?
Plaut. Rud. 1, 2, 16; id. Bacch. 1, 1, 42; id. Stich. 5, 4, 26:
Utrum studione id sibi habet an laudi putat Fore, si etc.,
Ter. Ad. 3, 3, 28:
Utrum igitur tandem perspicuisne dubia aperiuntur an dubiis perspicua tolluntur?
Cic. Fin. 4, 24, 67.—And affixed to utrum, but rarely:
Utrumne jussi persequemur otium... an hunc laborem etc.,
Hor. Epod. 1, 7; Plin. 17, 1, 1, § 4; Quint. 12, 1, 40.—
b.
Introduced by -ne:
quid fit? seditio tabetne an numeros augificat suos?
Enn. Trag. Rel. p. 23 Rib.:
servos esne an liber?
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 186:
idne agebas, ut tibi cum sceleratis an ut cum bonis civibus conveniret?
Cic. Lig. 18; 23:
custosne urbis an direptor et vexator esset Antonius?
id. Phil. 3, 27; id. Mur. 88; id. Sull. 22.—
So with an twice,
Cic. Cat. 1, 28; id. Att. 16, 8;
and five times,
id. Balb. 9.—
c.
Introduced by nonne:
Nonne ad servos videtis rem publicam venturam fuisse? An mihi ipsi fuit mors aequo animo oppetenda?
Cic. Sest. 47; id. Sex. Rosc. 43 sq.; id. Dom. 26; 127.—So with an twice, Cic. Phil. 11, 36.—
d.
Introduced by num:
si quis invidiae metus, num est vehementius severitatis invidia quam inertiae pertimescenda?
Cic. Cat. 1, 29; id. Mur. 76; id. Sest. 80:
Num quid duas habetis patrias an est illa patria communis?
id. Leg. 2, 2.—
e.
Without introductory particle:
quid igitur? haec vera an falsa sunt?
Cic. Ac. 2, 29, 95:
quid enim exspectas? bellum an tabulas novas?
id. Cat. 2, 18:
ipse percussit an aliis occidendum dedit?
id. Sex. Rosc. 74; id. Verr. 2, 106; id. Imp. Pomp. 53; id. Phil. 2, 27:
eloquar an sileam?
Verg. A. 3, 37:
auditis an me ludit amabilis Insania?
Hor. C. 3, 4, 5.—So an twice, Cic. Mil. 54;
three times,
Plin. Ep. 2, 8;
and six times,
Cic. Rab. 14; id. Pis. 40.—
B.
Indirect.
a.
Introduced by utrum:
quid tu, malum, curas, Utrum crudum an coctum edim?
Plaut. Aul. 3, 2, 16; id. Cist. 4, 2, 11; id. Bacch. 3, 4, 1; id. Mil. 2, 3, 74:
quaero, si quis... utrum is clemens an inhumanissimus esse videatur,
Cic. Cat. 4, 12:
agitur, utrum M. Antonio facultas detur an horum ei facere nihil liceat,
id. Phil. 5, 6; id. Sex. Rosc. 72; id. Imp. Pomp. 42; id. Verr. 1, 105.
► So once only in Vulg.
aut for an: Loquimini de me utrum bovem cujusquam tulerim aut asinum, 1 Reg. 12, 3.—And with -ne pleon.:
res in discrimine versatur, utrum possitne se contra luxuriem parsimonia defendere an deformata cupiditati addicatur,
Cic. Quinct. 92:
numquamne intelleges statuendum tibi esse, utrum illi, qui istam rem gesserunt, homicidaene sint an vindices libertatis?
id. Phil. 2, 30.—
b.
Introduced by -ne:
Fortunāne an forte repertus,
Att. Trag. Rel. p. 159 Rib. agitur autem liberine vivamus an mortem obeamus, Cic. Phil. 11, 24; id. Verr. 4, 73; id. Mil. 16:
nunc vero non id agitur, bonisne an malis moribus vivamus etc.,
Sall. C. 52, 10.—So with an three times, Cic. Or. 61.—
c.
Introduced by an:
haud scio an malim te videri... an amicos tuos plus habuisse,
Cic. Pis. 39.—
d.
Without introd. particle:
... vivam an moriar, nulla in me est metus,
Enn. Trag. Rel. p. 72 Rib.:
vivat an mortuus sit, quis aut scit aut curat?
Cic. Phil. 13, 33; 3, 18; id. Sex. Rosc. 88; id. Red. in Sen. 14.—
C.
Sometimes the opinion of the speaker or the probability inclines to the second interrogative clause (cf. infra, II. E.). and this is made emphatic, as a corrective of the former, or rather, or on the contrary:
ea quae dixi ad corpusne refers? an est aliquid, quod te suā sponte delectet?
Cic. Fin. 2, 33, 107:
Cur sic agere voluistis? An ignoratis quod etc.,
Vulg. Gen. 44, 15.—Hence, in the comic poets, an potius:
cum animo depugnat suo, Utrum itane esse mavelit ut... An ita potius ut etc.,
Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 31: id. Stich. 1, 2, 18; id. Trin. 2, 2, 25:
an id flagitium est, An potius hoc patri aequomst fieri, ut a me ludatur dolis?
Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 94.—
D.
The first part of the interrogation is freq. not expressed, but is to be supplied from the context; in this case, an begins the interrog., or, or rather, or indeed, or perhaps (but it does not begin an absolute, i. e. not disjunctive, interrog.): De. Credam ego istuc, si esse te hilarem videro. Ar. An tu esse me tristem putas? (where nonne me hilarem esse vides? is implied), Plaut. As. 5, 1, 10: Ch. Sed Thaïs multon ante venit? Py. An abiit jam a milite? Ter. Eun. 4, 5, 7:
An ego Ulixem obliscar umquam?
Att. Trag. Rel. p. 199 Rib.:
An parum vobis est quod peccatis?
Vulg. Josh. 22, 17:
est igitur aliquid, quod perturbata mens melius possit facere quam constans? an quisquam potest sine perturbatione mentis irasci?
Cic. Tusc. 4, 24, 54; cf. id. Clu. 22; id. Off. 3, 29: Debes hoc etiam rescribere, sit tibi curae Quantae conveniat Munatius; an male sarta Gratia nequiquam coit...? or is perhaps, etc., Hor. Ep. 1, 3, 31 K. and H. —So esp. in Cic., in order to make the truth of an assertion more certain, by an argumentum a minore ad majus:
cur (philosophus) pecuniam magno opere desideret vel potius curet omnino? an Scythes Anacharsis potuit pro nihilo pecuniam ducere, nostrates philosophi non potuerunt?
Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 89 sq.:
An vero P. Scipio T. Gracchum privatus interfecit, Catilinam vero nos consules perferemus?
id. Cat. 1, 1; so id. Rab. Perd. 5; id. Phil. 14, 5, 12 Muret.; id. Fin. 1, 2, 5, ubi v. Madv.—It sometimes introduces a question suggested by the words of another: He. Mane. Non dum audisti, Demea, Quod est gravissimum? De. An quid est etiam anplius? Is there then etc., Ter. Ad. 3, 4, 21:
sed ad haec, nisi molestum est, habeo quae velim. An me, inquam, nisi te audire vellem censes haec dicturum fuisse?
Cic. Fin. 1, 8, 28; 2, 22, 74; id. Tusc. 5, 26, 73; 5, 12, 35; id. Brut. 184; id. Fat. 2, 4; v. Madv. ad Cic. Fin. 1, 8, 28.—It sometimes anticipates an answer to something going before: At vero si ad vitem sensus accesserit, ut appetitum quendam habeat et per se ipsa moveatur, quid facturam putas? An ea, quae per vinitorem antea consequebatur, per se ipsa curabit? shall we not say that, must we not think that etc., Cic. Fin. 5, 14, 38, ubi v. Madv.—
E.
An non. and in one word, annon (in direct questions more freq. than necne):
isne est quem quaero an non?
Ter. Phorm. 5, 6, 12:
Hocine agis an non?
id. And. 1, 2, 15:
Tibi ego dico an non?
id. ib. 4, 4, 23:
utrum sit an non voltis?
Plaut. Am. prol. 56:
utrum cetera nomina in codicem accepti et expensi digesta habes annon?
Cic. Rosc. Com. 3 al. —Also in indirect questions = necne, q. v.:
abi, vise redieritne jam an non dum domum,
Ter. Phorm. 3, 4, 5:
videbo utrum clamorem opere conpleverint, an non est ita,
Vulg. Gen. 18, 21; 24, 21.—
F.
An ne, usually written anne, pleon. for an.
a.
In direct questions:
anne tu dicis quā ex causā vindicaveris?
Cic. Mur. 26. —
b.
In indirect questions:
nec. aequom anne iniquom imperet, cogitabit,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 19; id. Ps. 1, 1, 122:
percontarier, Utrum aurum reddat anne eat secum simul,
id. Bacch. 4, 1, 4:
Nam quid ego de consulato loquar, parto vis, anue gesto?
Cic. Pis. 1, 3:
cum interrogetur, tria pauca sint anne multa,
id. Ac. 2, 29:
Gabinio dicam anne Pompeio, an utrique,
id. Imp. Pomp. 19, 57; so id. Or. 61, 206:
Quid enim interest, divitias, opes, valetudinem bona dicas anne praeposita, cum etc.,
id. Fin. 4, 9, 23 Madv.; August. ap. Suet. Aug. 69 al. (for the omission of the second disjunctive clause or the particle necne representing it, v. utrum;
instances of this usage in eccl. Lat. are,
Vulg. Lev. 13, 36; 14, 36; ib. Num. 11, 23 al.).—
II.
In disjunctive clauses that express doubt, or.
A.
Utrum stultitiā facere ego hunc an malitiā Dicam, scientem an imprudentem, incertus sum. Ter. Phorm. 4, 3, 54:
ut nescias, utrum res oratione an verba sententiis illustrentur,
Cic. de Or. 2, 13, 56:
honestumne factu sit an turpe, dubitant,
id. Off. 1, 3, 9:
nescio, gratulerne tibi an timeam,
id. Fam. 2, 5; Caes. B. G. 7, 5:
pecuniae an famae minus parceret, haud facile discerneres,
Sall. C. 25, 3; so id. ib. 52, 10; Suet. Aug. 19; id. Tib. 10; id. Claud. 15:
cognoscet de doctrinā, utrum ex Deo sit an ego a me ipso loquar,
Vulg. Joan. 7, 17; ib. Eccl. 2, 19 al.—
B.
An sometimes denotes uncertainty by itself, without a verb of doubting (dubito, dubium or incertum est, etc., vet in such cases the editors are divided between an and aut; cf. Mos. and Orell. ad Cic. Rep. 1, 12): verene hoc memoriae proditum est [p. 115] regem istum Numam Pythagorae ipsius discipulum, an certe Pythagoreum fuisse? Cic. Rep. 2, 15, where B. and K. read aut certe: Cn. Octavius est an Cn. Cornelius quidam tuus familiaris, summo genere natus, terrae filius;
is etc.,
id. Fam. 7, 9 B. and K.:
Themistocles quidem, cum ei Simonides an quis alius artem memoriae polliceretur, Oblivionis, inquit, mallem,
Simonides or some other person, id. Fin. 2, 32, 104; id. Fam. 7, 9, 3; id. Att. 1, 3, 2; 2, 7, 3; v. Madv. ad Cic. Fin. 2, 32, 104.—
C.
It often stands for sive (so esp. in and after the Aug. per.):
quod sit an non, nihil commovet analogiam,
whether this be so or not, Varr. L. L. 9, § 105 Müll.; Att. ap. Prisc. p. 677 P.; Ov. R. Am. 797:
saucius an sanus, numquid tua signa reliqui,
id. F. 4, 7:
Illa mihi referet, si nostri mutua curast, An minor, an toto pectore deciderim,
Tib. 3, 1, 20; Tac. A. 11, 26:
sive nullam opem praevidebat inermis atque exul, seu taedio ambiguae spei an amore conjugis et liberorum,
id. ib. 14, 59.—
D.
The first disjunctive clause is freq. to be supplied from the gen. idea or an may stand for utrum—necne (cf. supra, I. D.):
qui scis, an, quae jubeam, sine vi faciat? (vine coactus is to be supplied),
how knowest thou whether or not he will do it without compulsion? Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 20:
An dolo malo factum sit, ambigitur,
Cic. Tull. 23:
quaesivi an misisset (periplasmata),
id. Verr. 4, 27:
Vide an facile fieri tu potueris, cum etc.,
id. Fragm. B. 13, 2, 1:
praebete aurem et videte an mentiar,
Vulg. Job, 6, 28: de L. Bruto fortasse dubitaverim an propter infinitum odium tyranni effrenatius in Aruntem invaserit, I might doubt whether or not, etc., Cic. Tusc. 4, 22, 50; id. Verr. 3, 76:
Quis scit an adiciant hodiernae crastina summae Tempora di superi?
Hor. C. 4, 7, 17; Plin. Ep. 6, 21, 3; Quint. 2, 17, 38:
Sine videamus an veniat Elias,
Vulg. Matt. 27, 49:
tria sine dubio rursus spectanda sunt, an sit, quid sit, quale sit,
Quint. 5, 10, 53:
dubium an quaesitā morte,
Tac. A. 1, 5; 6, 50; 4, 74:
Multitudo an vindicatura Bessum fuerit, incertum est,
Curt. 7, 5:
diu Lacedaemonii, an eum summae rei praeponerent, deliberaverunt,
Just. 6, 2, 4 et saep.—
E.
Since in such distrib. sentences expressive of doubt, the opinion of the speaker or the probability usually inclines to the second, i. e. to the clause beginning with an, the expressions haud scio an, nescio an, dubito an (the latter through all pers. and tenses), incline to an affirmative signification, I almost know, I am inclined to think, I almost think, I might say, I might assert that, etc., for perhaps, probably (hence the opinion is incorrect that an, in this situation, stands for an non; for by an non a negation of the objective clause is expressed, e. g. nescio an non beatus sit, I am almost of the opinion that he is not happy, v. infra, and cf. Beier ad Cic. Off. 1, Exc. XI. p. 335 sq.; Cic. uses haud scio an eleven times in his Orations;
nescio an, four times): atque haud scio an, quae dixit sint vera omnia,
Ter. And. 3, 2, 45:
crudele gladiatorum spectaculum et inhumanum non nullis videri solet: et haud scio an ita sit, ut nunc fit,
Cic. Tusc. 2, 17, 41; id. Fl. 26:
testem non mediocrem, sed haud scio an gravissimum,
perhaps, id. Off. 3, 29:
constantiam dico? nescio an melius patientiam possim dicere,
id. Lig. 9; id. Fam. 9, 19:
ingens eo die res, ac nescio an maxima illo bello gesta sit,
Liv. 23, 16; Quint. 12, 11, 7 al.:
si per se virtus sine fortunā ponderanda sit, dubito an Thrasybulum primum omuium ponam,
I am not certain whether I should not prefer Thrasybulus to all others, Nep. Thras. 1 Dähne:
dicitur acinace stricto Darius dubitāsse an fugae dedecus honestā morte vitaret,
i. e. was almost resolved upon, Curt. 4, 5, 30:
ego dubito an id improprium potius appellem,
Quint. 1, 5, 46; Gell. 1, 3 al.—Hence, a neg. objective clause must contain in this connection the words non, nemo, nullus, nihil, numquam, nusquam, etc.:
dubitet an turpe non sit,
he is inclined to believe that it is not bad, Cic. Off. 3, 12, 50:
haud scio an ne opus quidem sit, nihil umquam deesse amicis,
id. Am. 14, 51:
eloquentiā quidem nescio an habuisset parem neminem,
id. Brut. 33: quod cum omnibus est faciendum tum haud scio an nemini potius quam tibi, to no one perhaps more, id. Off. 3, 2, 6:
meā sententiā haud scio an nulla beatior esse possit,
id. Sen. 16; id. Leg. 1, 21:
non saepe atque haud scio an numquam,
id. Or. 2, 7 al. —
F.
Sometimes the distributive clause beginning with an designates directly the opposite, the more improbable, the negative; in which case nescio an, haud scio an, etc., like the Engl. I know not whether, signify I think that not, I believe that not, etc.; hence, in the object. clause, aliquis, quisquam, ullus, etc., must stand instead of nemo, nullus, etc. (so for the most part only after Cic.): an profecturus sim, nescio, I know not (i. e. I doubt, I am not confident) whether I shall effect any thing, Sen. Ep. 25:
opus nescio an superabile, magnum certe tractemus,
id. Q. N. 3, praef. 4; Caecil. ap. Cic. Fam. 6, 7, 6: haud scio an vivere nobis liceret, I know not whether we, etc., Cic. Har. Resp. 11, 22: doleo enim maximam feminam eripi oculis civitatis, nescio an aliquid simile visuris, for I know not whether they will ever see any thing of this kind, Plin. Ep. 7, 19; Val. Max. 5, 2, 9:
nescio an ullum tempus jucundius exegerim,
I do not know whether I have ever passed time more pleasantly, id. 3, 1:
namque huic uni contigit, quod nescio an ulli,
Nep. Timol. 1, 1; Sen. Contr. 3 praef.; Quint. 9, 4, 1:
nostri quoque soloecum, soloecismum nescio an umquam dixerint,
Gell. 5, 20 al. Cf. upon this word Hand, Turs. I. pp. 296-361, and Beier, Exc. ad Cic. Am. pp. 202-238.
2.
an-, v. ambi.
3.
- ăn. This word appears in forsan, forsitan, and fortasse an (Att. Trag. Rel. p. 151 Rib.) or fortassan, seeming to enhance the idea of uncertainty and doubt belonging to fors, etc., and is regarded by some as the Greek conditional particle an, and indeed one of these compounds, forsitan, sometimes in the Vulgate, translates an; as, Joan. 4, 10; 5, 46; 8, 19; and in 3, Joan. 9, it still represents the various reading, an.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > an

12 kofia

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia

[Swahili Plural] kofia

[English Word] hat

[English Plural] hats

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia

[Swahili Plural] kofia

[English Word] cap

[English Plural] caps

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Swahili Example] kofia anayovaa ni ya kindoro

[English Example] he is wearing a red cap

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia

[Swahili Plural] kofia

[English Word] fez

[English Plural] fezzes

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia

[Swahili Plural] kofia

[English Word] headgear

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia ya bulibuli

[Swahili Plural] kofia za bulibuli

[English Word] embroidered white cap

[English Plural] embroidered white caps

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Related Words] bulibuli

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia ngumu

[Swahili Plural] kofia ngumu

[English Word] hard hat

[English Plural] hard hats

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Related Words] -gumu

[Swahili Example] kofia ngumu inayovaliwa na wachimba bati wa Bolivia (http://72.14.209.104/search?q=cache:5Ifq4HjPzDkJ:www.unchs.org/unchs1/llm/series/Swahili_Book_12.doc+%22kofia+ngumu%22&hl=en&gl=us&ct=clnk&cd=1 Diwani kama Kiongozi)

[English Example] a hard hat that is worn by tin miners of Bolivia

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia ya kibandiko

[Swahili Plural] kofia za kibandiko

[English Word] ordinary cap

[English Plural] ordinary caps

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Related Words] kibandiko

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia ya kitunga

[Swahili Plural] kofia za kitunga

[English Word] ordinary cap

[English Plural] ordinary caps

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Related Words] -tunga

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia ya zari

[Swahili Plural] kofia za zari

[English Word] cap with decorated braid

[English Plural] caps with decorated braids

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Related Words] zari

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] kofia ya miba

[Swahili Plural] kofia ya miiba

[English Word] crown of thorns

[English Plural] crowns of thorns

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 9/10

[Derived Language] Arabic

[Swahili Example] aliitazama sanamu ya Yesu kuanzia kwenye kofia ya miba [Kez]

[English Example] she looked at the statue of Jesus beginning with the crown of thorns

------------------------------------------------------------

Swahili-english dictionary > kofia

13 ὁ

ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

A demonstr. Pronoun.

B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.

C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual τοῖιν Od.18.34
, al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ; οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404
(anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ; τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11
; τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18
; τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e
; τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e
; τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75
(τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484, ταῖν Lys.19.17
, Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem., μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8
(Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)

A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):

I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun, αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105
; τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186
, cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.

II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12
, al.

III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ; θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43
, cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.

IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.

V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.

VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,
ὁ δέ
the former, Pl.Prt. 359e
, Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595
; τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d
, etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28
, cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ; πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c
; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg., ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6
: sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317
-19, cf. 116 ; τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102
, cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.

2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24
; τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b
; οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a
, etc.

3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41
; νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c
, cf. Phlb. 13c.

4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.

5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3
, cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304
; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ; τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843
, etc. ; ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205
(v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ; σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf. μέν D.
III ; γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d
, cf. Tht. 181d.

6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491
; τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3
, cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87
; ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6
: this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.

7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.

8 the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ' ὁ.. οὔθ' ὁ Il.15.417
; ἢ τοῖσιν ἢ τοῖς A.Supp. 439
; οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς Pl.Lg. 701e
.

VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,

1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v. ὅς A.
II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc., καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a
, cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt., καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61
, al.

2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b
: but mostly in acc., καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23
, cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ; τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141
, cf. 9.68 ; τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243
; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398
, cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.; τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53
; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.

VIII abs. usages of single cases,

1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12
.

b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ; τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46
; δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210
:—only poet.

c of Manner,
τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν
in this way, thus, Od.8.510
.

d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48
.

e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.

2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose, τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d
, Sph. 230b.

b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.

3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6), τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37
; τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89
; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.

4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14
; τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90
: sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107
,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.

5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.

b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.; ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32
, cf. A.Eu. 462 ; τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59
.

c in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (lit. before this [day]), and to-day's, IG9(2).517.43 (Larissa, iii B.C.).

6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs., ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90
, Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.; ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71
; τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c
: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47
codd.; with πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19
, cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).

B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,
αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον
the hindmost man, Il.11.178
; τὸν ἄριστον 17.80
; τὸν δύστηνον 22.59
; τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325
; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in τῶν ἄλλων 2.674
, al.: with Advs., τὸ πρίν 24.543
, al.; τὸ πάρος περ 17.720
; τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583
; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ; τὰ πρῶτα 1.6
,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ; ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559
.—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.

I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron., τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5
; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12; οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b
.

b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).

c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.

d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.

2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109
; πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242
, etc.

b freq. with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45
, etc.

3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.

4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.

5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.; τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148
; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.

6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ; τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b
; ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d
, cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ; ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8
; τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8
: hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.

7 before Prons.,

a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc., τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a
,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ; τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a
; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.

b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.

c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,
ὁ τοιοῦτος
that sort of person, X.Mem.4.2.21
, etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art., τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13
.

8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6, πολύς 11.3
, etc.

9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.

II elliptic expressions:

1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.

2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers., τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48
. But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86
; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.

3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.

4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.

5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52
; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266
, cf.[315] (lyr.); ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412
(lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ; τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731
.

C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262
, cf. 1.300, al. ; Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526
(lyr.); Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86
; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3
, cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag., τῆς S.OC 1258
, Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.); τῷ S.Ph.14
; τήν Id.OC 747
, Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg. τεῦ Il.18.192
(s.v.l.).

D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:

a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.

b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65
, ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60
, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ

14 S

S, s, indecl. n. or (agreeing with littera) f.
I.
The eighteenth letter of the Latin alphabet, corresponding in form to the old Greek S for S (Etruscan in a reversed form,);
in its nature a sibilant semi-vowel, whose peculiarities were much discussed by the ancients, and are even treated of in a special work by Messala, a contemporary of Augustus (Messala in libro de S littera,
Quint. 1, 7, 23; cf. Mart. Cap. 3, § 245).—
II.
As an initial and medial it has a hard and sharp sound (which is softened, however, between two vowels), and is therefore joined only with the tenues (c, p, t; cf., on the contrary, the Gr. sbennumi);
and, as a medial, often written double after long vowels: caussa, cassus, divissiones (these forms, used by Cicero and Vergil, were already uncommon in Quintilian's time,
Quint. 1, 7, 20; v. Corss. Ausspr. 1, 283 sq.).—
III.
As a final it had a weakened sound, and therefore not only admitted the medial b before it (plebs, urbs, abs; Arabs, chalybs, etc.; v. the letter B), but often entirely disappeared. So in the ante-class. poets down to the early years of Cicero (and also in his own poem, entitled Aratus, written in his youth), before words beginning with a consonant, to avoid position: Ratu' Romulus, Fulviu' Nobilior, gravi' Terra, est sati' bella, Hyperioni' cursum, Virgine' nam sibi, etc.; cf. Cic. Or. 48, 161; Quint. 9, 4, 38; and v. Freund, in Jahn's Neue Jahrb. 1835, XIII. p. 25 sq.; less freq. before words beginning with a vowel, in which case, to avoid a hiatus, the vowel before s was also elided; vas' argenteis (for vasis argenteis) and palm' et crinibus (for palmis et crinibus); v. Cic. Or. 45, 153. So, too, in the fourth Epitaph of the Scipios (Inscr. Orell. 553), L. CORNELIO L. F. instead of CORNELIOS (cf. a similar elision of the M under that letter). Final s is also elided, and the preceding vowel either dropped with it or weakened, in the forms sat from satis, mage from magis; in the neutr. forms of adjectives of the third declension, acre, agreste, facile (v. the letter E); in the collat. forms of the sec. pers. sing. pass., fatere, fateare, fatebare, etc.; in the gen. sing. of the first, second, and fifth declensions, and in the nom. plur. of the first and second declensions (aurai for aura-is, analog. to reg is, etc.). Lastly, s disappears in the (mostly familiar) collat. forms abin', scin', viden', satin', from abisne, scisne, videsne, satisne, etc.—
IV.
As an etymological initial aspirate, s appears in many words whose Greek equivalents begin with a vowel: sal, semi-, serpo, sex, super, sus, corresp. to hals, hêmi-, herpô, hex, huper, us, etc.; si (archaic sei), sero, Segesta, corresp. to ei, ERÔ (whence eirô), Egesta. Less freq. in radical words beginning with a consonant: sculpo corresp. to gluphô, and the derivatives scruta, from grutê, and scrupedae, from kroupeza. To soften the termination, s appears in abs = ab, and ex corresp. to ek.—Very freq., on the contrary, an initial s appears in cognate forms in other languages, where corresp. Latin words have lost the s: Lat. fallo, Gr. sphallô; fungus, Gr. sphongos; fides, Gr. sphidê (comp. also nix with Engl. [p. 1609] snow, nurus with old Germ. snur, daughterin-law); cf. also cutis and scutum; cauda and root sku-, in Goth. skauts, etc.; casa and Gr. skia, skênê; cerno and Gr. krinô for skirnô, skôr, skôria; calumnia and skallô; gradior and root scra-, Germ. schreiten; parco and sparnos; penuria and spanis; pando and spaô; tego and stegô; tono and stonos; taurus and Sanscr. sthūras, Germ. Stier al.; v. Corss. Ausspr. 1, p. 277 sqq.—In the middle of a word s is dropped in at from ast.—
V.
S is interchanged,
A.
Most freq. with r; in partic., an original s, between two vowels, becomes r; v. Varr. L. L. 7, § 26 Müll.; so foederum for foedesum, plurima for plusima, meliorem for meliosem, Lares for Lases, etc.; cf. eram and sum, quaero and quaeso, nasus and naris. Appius Claudius, the censor, is said to have introduced r into the names Furius, Valerius, etc., in place of s, B.C. 312 (v. the letter R, II.).—
B.
With d: Claudius, from the Sabine Clausus; and, on the other hand, rosa, corresp. to the Gr. rhodon; cf. Schneid. Gram. 1, p. 259.—
C.
With t: tensus and tentus, resina corresp. to rhêtinê; and, on the contrary, aggrettus for aggressus; mertare, pultare, for mersare, pulsare (perh. also assentor for assensor).—
D.
With x; v. that letter.—
VI.
S is assimilated before f in the compounds of dis: differo, difficilis, diffluo, etc.; v. 3. dis.— On the other hand, it arises by assimilation from d, in assum, assumo, cessi, for adsum, adsumo, ced-si; from t in fassus, from fateor; from b in jussi, from jubeo; from m in pressi, from premo; from r in gessi, from gero; and dossuarius, from dorsum. —
VII.
As an abbreviation, S denotes sacrum, semis, sibi, suis, etc.; S. AS. D., sub asciā dedicavit; S. C., senatusconsultum; perh. also, sententia collegii (Inscr. Orell. 2385); S. P., sua pecunia; S. P. Q. R., Senatus Populusque Romanus, etc.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > S

15 s

S, s, indecl. n. or (agreeing with littera) f.
I.
The eighteenth letter of the Latin alphabet, corresponding in form to the old Greek S for S (Etruscan in a reversed form,);
in its nature a sibilant semi-vowel, whose peculiarities were much discussed by the ancients, and are even treated of in a special work by Messala, a contemporary of Augustus (Messala in libro de S littera,
Quint. 1, 7, 23; cf. Mart. Cap. 3, § 245).—
II.
As an initial and medial it has a hard and sharp sound (which is softened, however, between two vowels), and is therefore joined only with the tenues (c, p, t; cf., on the contrary, the Gr. sbennumi);
and, as a medial, often written double after long vowels: caussa, cassus, divissiones (these forms, used by Cicero and Vergil, were already uncommon in Quintilian's time,
Quint. 1, 7, 20; v. Corss. Ausspr. 1, 283 sq.).—
III.
As a final it had a weakened sound, and therefore not only admitted the medial b before it (plebs, urbs, abs; Arabs, chalybs, etc.; v. the letter B), but often entirely disappeared. So in the ante-class. poets down to the early years of Cicero (and also in his own poem, entitled Aratus, written in his youth), before words beginning with a consonant, to avoid position: Ratu' Romulus, Fulviu' Nobilior, gravi' Terra, est sati' bella, Hyperioni' cursum, Virgine' nam sibi, etc.; cf. Cic. Or. 48, 161; Quint. 9, 4, 38; and v. Freund, in Jahn's Neue Jahrb. 1835, XIII. p. 25 sq.; less freq. before words beginning with a vowel, in which case, to avoid a hiatus, the vowel before s was also elided; vas' argenteis (for vasis argenteis) and palm' et crinibus (for palmis et crinibus); v. Cic. Or. 45, 153. So, too, in the fourth Epitaph of the Scipios (Inscr. Orell. 553), L. CORNELIO L. F. instead of CORNELIOS (cf. a similar elision of the M under that letter). Final s is also elided, and the preceding vowel either dropped with it or weakened, in the forms sat from satis, mage from magis; in the neutr. forms of adjectives of the third declension, acre, agreste, facile (v. the letter E); in the collat. forms of the sec. pers. sing. pass., fatere, fateare, fatebare, etc.; in the gen. sing. of the first, second, and fifth declensions, and in the nom. plur. of the first and second declensions (aurai for aura-is, analog. to reg is, etc.). Lastly, s disappears in the (mostly familiar) collat. forms abin', scin', viden', satin', from abisne, scisne, videsne, satisne, etc.—
IV.
As an etymological initial aspirate, s appears in many words whose Greek equivalents begin with a vowel: sal, semi-, serpo, sex, super, sus, corresp. to hals, hêmi-, herpô, hex, huper, us, etc.; si (archaic sei), sero, Segesta, corresp. to ei, ERÔ (whence eirô), Egesta. Less freq. in radical words beginning with a consonant: sculpo corresp. to gluphô, and the derivatives scruta, from grutê, and scrupedae, from kroupeza. To soften the termination, s appears in abs = ab, and ex corresp. to ek.—Very freq., on the contrary, an initial s appears in cognate forms in other languages, where corresp. Latin words have lost the s: Lat. fallo, Gr. sphallô; fungus, Gr. sphongos; fides, Gr. sphidê (comp. also nix with Engl. [p. 1609] snow, nurus with old Germ. snur, daughterin-law); cf. also cutis and scutum; cauda and root sku-, in Goth. skauts, etc.; casa and Gr. skia, skênê; cerno and Gr. krinô for skirnô, skôr, skôria; calumnia and skallô; gradior and root scra-, Germ. schreiten; parco and sparnos; penuria and spanis; pando and spaô; tego and stegô; tono and stonos; taurus and Sanscr. sthūras, Germ. Stier al.; v. Corss. Ausspr. 1, p. 277 sqq.—In the middle of a word s is dropped in at from ast.—
V.
S is interchanged,
A.
Most freq. with r; in partic., an original s, between two vowels, becomes r; v. Varr. L. L. 7, § 26 Müll.; so foederum for foedesum, plurima for plusima, meliorem for meliosem, Lares for Lases, etc.; cf. eram and sum, quaero and quaeso, nasus and naris. Appius Claudius, the censor, is said to have introduced r into the names Furius, Valerius, etc., in place of s, B.C. 312 (v. the letter R, II.).—
B.
With d: Claudius, from the Sabine Clausus; and, on the other hand, rosa, corresp. to the Gr. rhodon; cf. Schneid. Gram. 1, p. 259.—
C.
With t: tensus and tentus, resina corresp. to rhêtinê; and, on the contrary, aggrettus for aggressus; mertare, pultare, for mersare, pulsare (perh. also assentor for assensor).—
D.
With x; v. that letter.—
VI.
S is assimilated before f in the compounds of dis: differo, difficilis, diffluo, etc.; v. 3. dis.— On the other hand, it arises by assimilation from d, in assum, assumo, cessi, for adsum, adsumo, ced-si; from t in fassus, from fateor; from b in jussi, from jubeo; from m in pressi, from premo; from r in gessi, from gero; and dossuarius, from dorsum. —
VII.
As an abbreviation, S denotes sacrum, semis, sibi, suis, etc.; S. AS. D., sub asciā dedicavit; S. C., senatusconsultum; perh. also, sententia collegii (Inscr. Orell. 2385); S. P., sua pecunia; S. P. Q. R., Senatus Populusque Romanus, etc.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > s

16 ἄρχω

ἄρχω, [dialect] Ep. inf.

A ἀρχέμεναι Il.20.154
: [tense] impf. ἦρχον ib.2.378, etc.; [dialect] Dor. ἆρχον Pi.O.10(11).51
: [tense] fut. ἄρξω Od.4.667
, A.Pr. 940, Th.1.144: [tense] aor. ἦρξα, [dialect] Ep. ἄρξα Od.14.230
, etc.: [tense] pf. ἦρχα CIG3487.14
([place name] Thyatira), Decr. ap. Plu.2.851f:—[voice] Med., Od.8.90, etc.; non-thematic part. ἄρχμενος Call.Aet.3.1.56
, al.: [tense] impf., Il.9.93, Hdt.5.28: [tense] fut. ἄρξομαι (in med. sense, v. infr.) Il.9.97, E.IA 442, X.Cyr.8.8.2; [dialect] Dor. ἀρξεῦμαι Theoc.7.95
: [tense] aor. ἠρξάμην Od.23.310
, etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. ἦργμαι only in med. sense, v. infr. 1.2: [tense] aor. ἤρχθην, ἀρχθῆναι Th.6.18
, Arist.Pol. 1277b13, v. infr.11.4:—to be first,

I in Time, begin, make a beginning, [voice] Act. and [voice] Med. (in Hom. the [voice] Act. is more freq., in [dialect] Att. Prose the [voice] Med., esp. where personal action is emphasized),
πολέμου ἄρχειν
to be the aggressor, Th.1.53
; π. ἄρχεσθαι to begin one's operations, X.HG6.3.6; ἄρχειν τοῦ λόγου to open a conversation, Id.An.1.6.6; ἄρχεσθαι τοῦ λόγου to begin one's speech, ib.3.2.7. Constr.:

1 mostly c. gen., make a beginning of, ἄρχειν πολέμοιο Il.4.335
; μύθων Od.3.68
; τῶν ἀδικημάτων πρῶτον τοῦτο ἄρξαι Hdt. 1.2
; ἦρξεν ἐμβολῆς A.Pers. 409
; τοῦ κακοῦ ib. 353; ἄρχειν χειρῶν ἀδίκων, ἄρχειν τῆς πληγῆς, strike the first blow, Antipho 4.2.1 and 2:— in [voice] Med. in religious sense, = ἀπάρχεσθαι, ἀρχόμενος μελέων beginning with the limbs, Od.14.428, cf. E. Ion 651; but [voice] Act., σπονδαῖσιν ἄρξαι Pi.I.6(5).37
.

2 c. gen., begin from or with.., ἐν σοὶ μὲν λήξω σέο δ' ἄρξομαι Il.9.97
; ἄρχεσθαι Διός Pi.N.5.25
; πόθεν ἄρξωμαι; A.Ch. 855; πόθεν ποτὲ ἦρκται Hp. VM5
; ἄρχεσθαι, ἦρχθαι ἔκ τινος, Od.23.199, Hp.Off.11; ἀπό τινος freq. in Prose, ἀρξάμενοι αὐτίκα ἀπὸ παιδίων even from boyhood, Hdt.3.12; but more commonly ἐκ παίδων, ἐκ παιδός, etc., Pl.R. 408d, Thg. 128d:— ἀπό in non-temporal relations, ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ σοῦ. i.e. including yourself, Pl.Grg. 471c, cf. D.18.297; ἀπὸ τῶν πατέρων X.Mem.3.5.15
; μέχρι τῶν δώδεκα ἀπὸ μιᾶς ἀρξάμενος Pl.Lg. 771c
; ἀφ' ἱερῶν ἠργμένη ἀρχή ib. 771a; ἀφ' Ἑστίας ἀρχόμενος Ar.V. 846
.

3 c. gen. rei et dat. pers., ἄρχε θεοῖς δαιτός begin a banquet to the gods, Il.15.95; τοῖς ἄρα μύθων ἦρχε 2.433
, etc.; τῇσι δὲ.. ἄρχετο μολπῆς Od.6.101
; ἦρξε τῇ πόλει ἀνομίας τὸ νόσημα Th.2.53
, cf. 12; τὴν ἡμέραν ἄρχειν ἐλευθερίας τῇ Ἑλλάδι X.HG2.2.23
; ἡμὶν οὐ σμικρῶν κακῶν ἦρξεν τὸ δῶρον S.Tr. 871
.

4 c. acc., ἄρχειν ὁδόν τινι, show him the way, Od.8.107 (but also ἄρχειν ὁδοῖο lead the way, 5.237): abs. (sc. ὁδόν) , ἄρχε δ' Ἀθήνη 3.12
; σὺ μὲν ἄρχε Il.9.69
; ἦ ῥα καὶ ἄρχε λέχοσδε κιών 3.447
; ἦρχε δ' ἄρα σφιν Ἄρης 5.592
, cf. infr. 11.2: with other accusatives, ἄρχειν ὕμνον Pi.N.3.10
; ἅπερ ἦρξεν A.Ag. 1529
(lyr.); λυπηρόν τι S.El. 552
; ὕβριν Id.Fr. 368
.

5 of actions, σέο δ' ἕξεται ὅττι κεν ἄρχῃ Il.9.102
: freq. c. inf., τοῖσιν δ' ἦρχ' ἀγορεύειν among them, Il.1.571, etc.; ἦρχε νέεσθαι, ἦρχ' ἴμεν, 2.84, 13.329; ἄρχετε νῦν νέκυας φορέειν Od.22.437
, etc.; ὑφαίνειν ἤρχετο μῆτιν Il.7.324
; ἤρξαντο οἰκοδομεῖν Th.1.107
; ἡ νόσος ἤρξατο γενέσθαι Id.2.47
: c. part., of continued action or condition, ἦρχον χαλεπαίνων Il.2.378
; ἢν ἄρξῃ ἀδικέων Hdt.4.119
; ἡ ψυχὴ ἄρχεται ἀπολείπουσα X.Cyr.8.7.26
; πόθεν ἂν ὀρθῶς ἀρξαίμεθα ἐπαινοῦντες; Pl.Mx. 237a
, cf. Tht. 187a (but ἄ. ἐπαινεῖν Id.Phdr. 241e
); ἄρξομαι διδάσκων X.Cyr.8.8.2
(but ἤρξω μανθάνειν Id.Mem.3.5.22
).

6 abs.,
ἄρχε
take the lead! Il.9.69
: generally, begin, ἄρχειν [τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν] τήνδε τὴν ἡμέραν Indut. ap. Th.4.118, cf. Lex ap.D.24.42; τὸ ἄρχον, opp. τὸ ἑπόμενον, Dam.Pr. 234: part.
ἀρχόμενος
at first, X.Eq.9.3
, Cyn.3.8, Isoc.2.54; at the beginning, ἀρχομένου δὲ πίθου καὶ λήγοντος Hes.Op. 368
, cf. Fr.192.4; ἀρχομένοισιν ἢ καταπαυομένοισι Ar.Eq. 1246
; ἄρχεται ὁ πόλεμος ἐνθένδε Th.2.1
; ἅμα ἦρι ἀρχομένῳ ibid.; θέρους εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου ib.47.

7 Gramm., of a word, ἄ. ἀπὸ φωνήεντος D.T.633.27
; ἡ ἄρχουσα (sc. συλλαβή) A.D.Synt.130.13.

II in point of Place or Station, rule, govern, command,

1 mostly c. gen., rule, be leader of.., Βοιωτῶν Il.2.494
, cf. Hdt.5.1, etc.

2 less freq. c. dat., ἀνδράσιν ἦρξα Od.14.230
, cf. 471, Il.2.805, Pi.P.3.4, A.Pr. 940, E.Andr. 666, IA 337, IG7.2830 ([place name] Hyettus), etc.; also ἐν δ' ἄρα τοῖσιν ἦρχ' held command among them, Il.13.690, cf. Pl.Phdr. 238a: c. inf. added, ἄρχε Μυρμιδόνεσσι μάχεσθαι led them on to fight, Il.16.65.

3 abs., rule, ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927
, cf. Pers. 774; esp. hold a magistracy, ὁκοῖόν τε εἴη ἄρχειν μετὰ τὸ βασιλεύειν Hdt.6.67
; at Athens, etc., to be archon, D.21.178; ἀρχάς, ἀρχὴν ἄρχειν, Hdt.3.80, Th.6.54; ἄρχειν τὴν ἐπώνυμον (with or without ἀρχήν) IG3.659, 693, SIG872.7.

4 [voice] Pass., with [tense] fut. ἄρξομαι Hdt.7.159
, Pi.O.8.45, A.Pers. 589, Lys.28.7; but ἀρχθήσομαι Arist.Pol. 1259b40
, D.C.65.10:—to be ruled, governed, etc., ὑπό τινος Hdt.1.127
; ἔκ τινος S.El. 264
, Ant.63; ὑπό τινι Hdt.1.91
, 103; σφόδρα ὑπό τινος Lys.12.92
; ἄρχε πρῶτον μαθὼν ἄρχεσθαι Sol.
ap.D.L.1.60, cf. Pl.Prt. 326d; δύνασθαι καὶ ἄρχεσθαι καὶ ἄρχειν Arist. Pol. 1277b14
;
οἱ ἀρχόμενοι
subjects, X.An.2
6.19, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄρχω

17 סתם

סָתַם(b. h.; = סחתם, Saf. of חתם) 1) to stop up, close, shut. Ab. Zar. V, 3 כדי שישתום ויִסְתּוֹם ויגוב, v. נָגַב. B. Mets.VII, 5 שלא יהא … ויהא סוֹתֵם את הפתחוכ׳ that he (the laborer) must not be greedy so as to shut the door before himself (make himself objectionable to employers). Ḥull.43a, a. e. מרה שניקבה וכבד סוֹתַמְתָּהּ if the bladder of the gall is perforated, and the liver (adhering to the perforated spot) closes it up. Ib. 49b חלב טהור סותם clean fat (such as it is permitted to eat) forms a stopper (to an adjacent organ, and makes the animal so affected permitted). Pes.IV, 9 (56a) ס׳ מי גיחוןוכ׳ he stopped up the water of the upper Gihon (2 Chr. 32:3); a. fr.Part. pass. סָתוּם; f. סְתוּמָה; pl. סְתוּמִים, סְתוּמִין; סְתוּמוֹת. Yeb.71b; Nidd.30b; Lev. R. s. 14 נפתח הס׳ ונסתםוכ׳ the organ which (in the embryonic stage) was closed, opens, and that which was open, closes itself. Bets.IV, 3 בית … ס׳ a room filled with fruit which was closed up (with bricks). Y. ib. 62c bot. לפסים ס׳ pots with their lids on (not yet cut apart); Tosef. ib. III, 13; Tosef.Sabb. XVI (XVII), 13. Snh.94a (ref. to לסרבה, Is. 9:6) מפני מה כל מ״ם … וזה ס׳ why is every Mem in the middle of a word open, and this one is closed (final Mem). Meg.3a פתוחין … וס׳ בסוףוכ׳ open in the middle of words and closed at the end (v. מנצפ״ך); a. fr.Esp. פרשה סתומה a paragraph in the Torah separated from the preceding by a vacant space in the middle of the line, opp. to פתוחה a section beginning a new indented line. Gen. R. s. 96, beg., v. infra. Treat. Sofrim I, 14 איזוהי ס׳ כל שהניחוכ׳ what is a closed paragraph? When space is left ; וכמה יניח … ותהא נקראת ס׳ and how much space must be left …, in order that the paragraph may be called closed?; a. fr. 2) to conceal. Gen. R. l. c. (ref. to the section beginning with Gen. 47:28) that paragraph is closed, שס׳ ממנווכ׳ because the Lord concealed from his vision all (coming) troubles; (Yalk. ib. 154 שנסתמו ממנו, v. infra); a. e.Part. pass. as ab. concealed, not explicitly stated, opp. מפורש. Zeb.53a יִלָּמֵד ס׳ מן המפורש let that which is not explicitly stated in a law be derived (by analogy) from what is explicitly stated; Sifra Aḥăré, beg. יְלַמֵּד פתוח על הס׳ let the explicit statement throw light on the implicit. Meg.15a כל … אבותיו ס׳ a person (mentioned in the Bible) whose deeds and the deeds of whose ancestors are not stated; a. fr.Y. Bets. l. c. (in Chald. dict.) סתומה the anonymous opinion, v. סְתָמָא. Nif. נִסְתַּם, Hithpa. הִסְתַּתֵּם, Nithpa. נִסְתַּתֵּם to be closed; to be concealed; to be silenced. Gen. R. l. c. בקש … ונ׳ ממנו Jacob wanted to reveal the end of the captivity, and it was closed before him; Yalk. ib. l. c. נִסְתְּמוּ ממנו, v. supra. Cant. R. to I, 4 היה אומר … ומִסְתַּתְּמִין he said a word (of charm) over them, and they became silent (dumb). Snh.31b לעולם … עד שיִסְתַּתֵּם טענותיו (Alf. שיִסְתּוֹם; Asheri שיסתיר) he may continually bring evidence and refute, until he declares himself closed as to his pleas, i. e., until he declares that he has no more evidence to offer. Yeb.76a; Tosef. ib. X, 4, a. e. נ׳ כשר if the perforation in the membrum has closed itself again, he is considered unblemished. Kel. XIV, 8 נִסְתַּתְּמוּ נקבין if the holes have been stopped up. Snh.94a לכך נ׳ therefore the Mem was closed (the final מ was written). Sot.13b נסתתמו ממנו שעריוכ׳ the gates of wisdom were closed before him (he lost his judicial judgment); a. e. Pi. סִיתֵּם to close, Y.Snh.X, 28c bot. היו … מְסַתְּמִיןוכ׳ the ministering angels closed the windows (of heaven) that the prayer of Manasseh might not rise; Deut. R. s. 2; (Pesik. Shub., p. 162b> סוֹתְמִין).

Jewish literature > סתם

18 סָתַם

סָתַם(b. h.; = סחתם, Saf. of חתם) 1) to stop up, close, shut. Ab. Zar. V, 3 כדי שישתום ויִסְתּוֹם ויגוב, v. נָגַב. B. Mets.VII, 5 שלא יהא … ויהא סוֹתֵם את הפתחוכ׳ that he (the laborer) must not be greedy so as to shut the door before himself (make himself objectionable to employers). Ḥull.43a, a. e. מרה שניקבה וכבד סוֹתַמְתָּהּ if the bladder of the gall is perforated, and the liver (adhering to the perforated spot) closes it up. Ib. 49b חלב טהור סותם clean fat (such as it is permitted to eat) forms a stopper (to an adjacent organ, and makes the animal so affected permitted). Pes.IV, 9 (56a) ס׳ מי גיחוןוכ׳ he stopped up the water of the upper Gihon (2 Chr. 32:3); a. fr.Part. pass. סָתוּם; f. סְתוּמָה; pl. סְתוּמִים, סְתוּמִין; סְתוּמוֹת. Yeb.71b; Nidd.30b; Lev. R. s. 14 נפתח הס׳ ונסתםוכ׳ the organ which (in the embryonic stage) was closed, opens, and that which was open, closes itself. Bets.IV, 3 בית … ס׳ a room filled with fruit which was closed up (with bricks). Y. ib. 62c bot. לפסים ס׳ pots with their lids on (not yet cut apart); Tosef. ib. III, 13; Tosef.Sabb. XVI (XVII), 13. Snh.94a (ref. to לסרבה, Is. 9:6) מפני מה כל מ״ם … וזה ס׳ why is every Mem in the middle of a word open, and this one is closed (final Mem). Meg.3a פתוחין … וס׳ בסוףוכ׳ open in the middle of words and closed at the end (v. מנצפ״ך); a. fr.Esp. פרשה סתומה a paragraph in the Torah separated from the preceding by a vacant space in the middle of the line, opp. to פתוחה a section beginning a new indented line. Gen. R. s. 96, beg., v. infra. Treat. Sofrim I, 14 איזוהי ס׳ כל שהניחוכ׳ what is a closed paragraph? When space is left ; וכמה יניח … ותהא נקראת ס׳ and how much space must be left …, in order that the paragraph may be called closed?; a. fr. 2) to conceal. Gen. R. l. c. (ref. to the section beginning with Gen. 47:28) that paragraph is closed, שס׳ ממנווכ׳ because the Lord concealed from his vision all (coming) troubles; (Yalk. ib. 154 שנסתמו ממנו, v. infra); a. e.Part. pass. as ab. concealed, not explicitly stated, opp. מפורש. Zeb.53a יִלָּמֵד ס׳ מן המפורש let that which is not explicitly stated in a law be derived (by analogy) from what is explicitly stated; Sifra Aḥăré, beg. יְלַמֵּד פתוח על הס׳ let the explicit statement throw light on the implicit. Meg.15a כל … אבותיו ס׳ a person (mentioned in the Bible) whose deeds and the deeds of whose ancestors are not stated; a. fr.Y. Bets. l. c. (in Chald. dict.) סתומה the anonymous opinion, v. סְתָמָא. Nif. נִסְתַּם, Hithpa. הִסְתַּתֵּם, Nithpa. נִסְתַּתֵּם to be closed; to be concealed; to be silenced. Gen. R. l. c. בקש … ונ׳ ממנו Jacob wanted to reveal the end of the captivity, and it was closed before him; Yalk. ib. l. c. נִסְתְּמוּ ממנו, v. supra. Cant. R. to I, 4 היה אומר … ומִסְתַּתְּמִין he said a word (of charm) over them, and they became silent (dumb). Snh.31b לעולם … עד שיִסְתַּתֵּם טענותיו (Alf. שיִסְתּוֹם; Asheri שיסתיר) he may continually bring evidence and refute, until he declares himself closed as to his pleas, i. e., until he declares that he has no more evidence to offer. Yeb.76a; Tosef. ib. X, 4, a. e. נ׳ כשר if the perforation in the membrum has closed itself again, he is considered unblemished. Kel. XIV, 8 נִסְתַּתְּמוּ נקבין if the holes have been stopped up. Snh.94a לכך נ׳ therefore the Mem was closed (the final מ was written). Sot.13b נסתתמו ממנו שעריוכ׳ the gates of wisdom were closed before him (he lost his judicial judgment); a. e. Pi. סִיתֵּם to close, Y.Snh.X, 28c bot. היו … מְסַתְּמִיןוכ׳ the ministering angels closed the windows (of heaven) that the prayer of Manasseh might not rise; Deut. R. s. 2; (Pesik. Shub., p. 162b> סוֹתְמִין).

Jewish literature > סָתַם

19 KVEÐA

(kveð; kvað, kváðum; kveðinn), v.

1) to say, utter;

hann kvað eigi orð, he did not utter a word;

kveða gleði-orð, to say a cheerful word;

with infin., hann kvað þat satt vera, he said it was true;

kveða at orði, to express oneself, say, speak;

2) to (compose and) say aloud (hann kvað vísu);

to recite, repeat (S. bað hann þá kveða kvæðit þat, er hann hafði ort);

3) with preps.:

kveða at, to say, state;

gramm. to pronounce, sound;

kveða e-t at e-m, to inflict on;

mikill harmr er at oss kveðinn, great grief has been sent on us;

kveða á, to fix, determine (kveða á stefnudag);

impers. to state;

kveðr þar skýrt á þetta, it is there expressly stated;

to cancel, object to (kveða á gögn, to cancel the evidence) to make up one’s mind, resolve;

kveða e-t upp, to recite, declare (þat skulu lög vera, sem hann kveðr upp);

kveða við, to reply, answer (hitki hann veit, hvat hann skal við kveða, ef);

to utter a cry, etc. (hundrinn kvað við hátt);

to sound (því næst kvað lúðr við);

4) refl., kveðast, to say of oneself;

þeir er biskupar kváðust vera, who said they were bishops;

hann kveðst eigi ríða mundu, he said he would not ride;

impers., mér kveðsk = ek kveð mér;

Kára kvaðsk (= Kári kvað sér) önnur ferð betri þykkja, K. said he thought another course preferable;

kveðast at, to exchange verses or songs.

* * *

sing. kveðr, pret. kvað, 2nd pers. kvatt, kvattú, Fms. vi. 386, pl. kváðu, kvóðu, and kóðu, Ls. 24, Hom. 12, Ó. H. 48, Fms. viii. 71, xi. 107; pret. subj. kvæði; imperat. kveð, kveð-þú, kvettú, vi. 361, mod. kveddu; with neg. suff., pres. kveðk-a-ek, I say not, Ýt. 7: [Ulf. qiþan = λέγειν, εἰπειν, ἐρειν; A. S. cweðan; Engl. quoth; O. H. G. quedan; Swed. quäda; Dan. kvæde; cp. Lat. in-quit]:—to say; né því er kveðr kona, nor what a woman says, Hm. 83; at þú Frey kveðir úleiðastarr lifa, Skm. 19; kveða ( dicunt) Heimdal valda véum, Gm. 13: in an epic sense, to say, orð kvað þá Vingi, Am. 37, 38; Glaumvör kvað at orði, 30, 32; ok hann þat orða, alls fyrst um kvað = Homer’s καί μιν φωνήσας …, Þkv. 2, 3, 9, 12; or, þá kvað þat Heimdalr; Þá kvað þat Þórr; þá kvað þat Þrymr, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 25, 30; Egill fékk úgleði mikla svá at hann kvað eigi orð, Eg. 518; k. gleði-orð, to say a cheerful word, Vígl. 89 new Ed.; þeir kvóðu ekki gott orð at honum, 655 vii. 3; er hann hafði þat mælt, þá kvað hann úti annat orð, Fms. xi. 16; hverr þessa stafa, ef hann verðr í nef kveðinn, if he is nasal in sound, Skálda 162; lýsingar-váttar Marðar kváðu svá at orði, Nj. 233; til báls ok til brands kveðr at fornu máli, as it is said in old saws, N. G. L. i. 50; Rannveig kvað vel at hann færi útan, Nj. 111:—with infin., hón kvad þar eigi kvenna-vist, Fms. vii. 274; kveðum þá mæla ( let them speak) á várar tungur, 656 C. 6: the pret. kvað (proncd. kvu) as adv. or absol., ‘tis said, they say, það kvað (kvu) vera, they say so.

2. with prep.; kveða at, adverb. so to say; svá mátti at kveða, id., Fms. xi. 72; er svá mun mega at k. at líf manna lægi við, Nj. 78; kveðr svá at, it is so said, Ver. 83; þá er svá at kveðit, 3; lögsögumaðr skal ráða ok at kveða ( determine) hvar hvergi dómr skal sitja, Grág. i. 27: gramm. to pronounce, sound, Skálda 165; mikill harmr er at oss kveðinn, mickle harm is doomed us, Nj. 201; mikit er at Kjartani kveðit (there’s mickle said against K., i. e. he is a doomed man), ok mun úhægt vera at göra við forlögum þeirra, Ld. 190: það kveðr mikið (lítið) að e-u, to be of great ( small) influence or importance:—kveða á, to fix, determine, Grág. i. 35, 39, Nj. 90, Ld. 74; var kveðit á brullaups-stefnu, Nj. 40; var gört um málit ok kveðit á fégjöld, 111, Fs. 68: to state, kveðr þar skýrt á þetta, it is expressly stated there, Ld. 334: a law term, to cancel, object to, kveða á gögn, to cancel the evidence, Grág. i. 67, 106: to fix, make up one’s mind, resolve, 100, Nj. 3, 252: part. ákveðinn, fixed, appointed, 256: fated, eigi má saka þik um þetta, segir Njáll, þvíat slíkt er mjök ákveðit, 166: ákveðin orð, an agreement, stipulation, Hkr. ii. 372; með ákveðnum orðum, in express words, Grett. 89; vant er mér þat at skýra með ákveðnum orðum, Sks. 660; með ákveðnu, id., K. Á. 208; mun ek ákveðit göra, hverir þar skulu vera, Ísl. ii. 346: ákveðin orð, pointed, libellous words, Bjarn. 57:—kveða við, to reply, Hm. 26:—k. upp, to pronounce, make known, Gísl. 10, Fms. vii. 88.

II. to sing; hón bað Þorstein kveða nokkut, Grett. 159; skemti Stúfr ok kvað flokk einn, ok er lokit var bað konungr hann enn k.—Hversu mörg hefir þú nú kvæðin kveðit? … hví kveðr þú flokka eina? Fms. vi. 391; skyldi ok engi kveða vísurnar, Nj. 71; Egill orti alla drápuna, ok hafði fest svá at hann mátti kveða um morguninn, Eg. 421; k. kvæði, Ísl. ii. 232; þótt hann kveði út kvæði þetta, Fms. v. 175; konungr mælti, tel þú oss kvæði nokkut,—Þormóðr settisk upp ok kvað hátt mjök, svá at heyrði um allan herinn, hann kvað Bjarka-mál en fornu, Ó. H. 207; harm hóf upp kvæðit ok kvað hátt, Eg. 427; slógu þá konur hring umhverfis hjallinn, en Þorbjörg sat uppi á seiðhjallinum, kvað Guðríðr þá kvæðit svá fagrt ok vel, at engi þóttisk heyrt hafa með fegri rödd kvæði kveðit, Þorf. Karl. 378: in mod. usage kveða is used of the rhapsodic delivery of a ballad (ríma), half reciting half singing, thus Icel. say, kveða rímur, to recite a ballad, as also kveða vel, to recite, sing well; hann er góðr kvæða-maðr, he is a good ballad-singer, but never of a hymn or full melody; þeir riðu um bygðina kveðandi um daginn, Fms. xi. 376; þá ferr hann með fjölkyngi, ef hann kveðr þat eða kennir, K. Þ. K.; nú eru Háva-mál kveðin, Háva höllu í, Hm. 165; ok Austmarr jöfri Sænskum gýmis ljóð at gamni kveðr, Ýt. 18; þar sat kona við kvern ok kvað forkunnar fagrt, Fms. vii. 233.

2. to make a verse; kvettú nú, Þjóðólfr, um deild þeirra, … Þjóðólfr kvað (and the verse follows), Fms. vi. 361; kveða vísu, to make a ditty, Fms., Nj. passim; kvæðit var mjök kveðit, Fms. v. 173; þessi vísa var ílla ort ok skal ek kveða aðra betri, hann kvað, vi. 416; heyr þjóðskáldit! kvattú svá, gröm, skömm? ekki eru þær hendingar jafnhávar, 386:—kveða á e-n, to challenge one in a song; kalla þær sé kveðit sik á | af kærleiks elsku-fundum, Skíða R. 3.

3. kveða við, to scream; kvað sá við í því er kesjan stóð á honum miðjum, Fms. viii. 354; hundrinn kvað við hátt, Nj. 114: to sound, því næst kvað lúðr við, the trumpet sounded, Fms. vi. 16, vii. 288; þeir létu kveða við lúðra sína, ix. 527; í því kvað við klokka, Fb. i. 417, Fms. iii. 60, ix. 510.

III. reflex. to say of oneself; þeir er biskupar kváðusk vera, who said they were bishops, Íb. 13; hann kveðsk eigi ríða mundu, Nj. 12; Njáll kvaðsk með því einu fara myndu, 105; þeir kváðusk eigi vita hverju gegndi, Fms. vii. 272; þeir er sét kveðask hafa seglin, 322; þeir kóðusk koma mundu, xi. 107; hann kvaðsk þess albúinn, Nj. 100; Óttarr kvaðsk eigi vara, at …, Fs. 87.

2. also impers., mér kveðsk = eg kveð mér; er þér kveðsk þá þykkja gott at deyja, Fms. xi. 153; hafði hann fátt um í fyrstu, en kvaðsk þetta (= kvað sér þetta) þó vel líka, ix. 291; Kára kvaðsk (i. e. Kári kvað sér) önnur ferð betri þykkja, K. said he would like better to take another course, Nj. 139; herfiligt kveðsk honum þykkja at hokra þar fyrir stokkum eða steinum, Fas. ii. 505; Glúmi kveðsk því betr þykkja, Rd. 286; kvaðsk þeim horfin-heilla at þykkja, Fms. vii. 272; honum kveðsk vel á lítask, vi. 99; þeim kvaðsk þykkja sér vandalaust, 107; Vigdísi kvaðsk eigi vera um lygi, Ld. 44; honum kvaðsk meira um at halda fram, Fb. iii. 447; honum kvaðsk svá hugr um segja, Sturl.

3. kveðask at, recipr. to exchange songs, a game played at a wake or dance; sá leikr var mönnum tíðr, at kveðask skyldu at, karlmaðr at konu, ok kona at karlmanni, Bs. i. 165: in mod. usage, kveðast á, to cap verses, each party in turn replying in a verse beginning with the letter with which the preceding one ends; Komdú nú að kveðast á | kvæðin okkar stór og smá, a ditty, cp. kveða á II. 2. above.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > KVEÐA

20 Cum

1.
cum (archaic form COM, found in an inscr., COM PREIVATVD; in MSS. sometimes quom or quum), prep. with abl. [for skom, Sanscr. root sak, together; cf. sequor, and Gr. koinos, sun], designates in gen. accompaniment, community, connection of one object with another (opp. sine, separatim, etc.), with, together, together with, in connection or company with, along with; sometimes also to be translated and.
I.
In gen., Plaut. Am. prol. 95:
qui cum Amphitruone abiit hinc in exercitum,
id. ib. prol. 125:
cum Pansā vixi in Pompeiano,
Cic. Att. 14, 20, 4:
semper ille antea cum uxore, tum sine eā,
id. Mil. 21, 55:
quibuscum essem libenter,
id. Fam. 5, 21, 1; cf.:
cum quibus in ceteris intellegis afuisse,
id. Sull. 3, 7:
si cenas hodie mecum,
Hor. Ep. 1, 7, 70:
vagamur egentes cum conjugibus et liberis,
Cic. Att. 8, 2, 3:
errare malo cum Platone, etc.,
id. Tusc. 1, 17, 39:
qui unum imperium unumque magistratum cum ipsis habeant,
Caes. B. G. 2, 3 et saep.—
b.
In an expression of displeasure:
in' hinc, quo dignus, cum donis tuis Tam lepidis,
Ter. Eun. 4, 3, 9; cf. Plaut. Most. 2, 2, 33; Ter. And. 5, 4, 38; id. Eun. 1, 2, 73; id. Heaut. 4, 6, 7 al.—
B.
In a designation of time with which some action concurs:
egone abs te abii hinc hodie cum diluculo?
Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 121; so,
cum primo luci,
id. Cist. 2, 1, 58:
cras cum filio cum primo luci ibo hinc,
Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 55; Cic. Off. 3, 31, 112; cf.:
cum primā luce,
id. Att. 4, 3, 4; and:
cum primo lumine solis,
Verg. A. 7, 130: cum primo mane, Auct. B. Afr. 62: cum mane, Lucil. ap. Diom. p. 372 P:
pariter cum ortu solis,
Sall. J. 106, 5:
pariter cum occasu solis,
id. ib. 68, 2; cf.:
cum sole reliquit,
Verg. A. 3, 568 et saep.:
mane cum luci simul,
Plaut. Merc. 2, 1, 31; v. simul: exiit cum nuntio (i. e. at the same time with, etc.), Caes. B. G. 5, 46; cf.: cum his nuntius Romam ad consulendum redit ( = hama toisde), Liv. 1, 32, 10:
simul cum dono designavit templo Jovis fines,
id. 1, 10, 5; cf.:
et vixisse cum re publicā pariter, et cum illā simul extinctus esse videatur,
Cic. de Or. 3, 3, 10.—
C.
In designating the relations, circumstances, way, and manner with which any act is connected, by which it is accompanied, under or in which it takes place, etc., with, in, under, in the midst of, among, to, at: aliquid cum malo suo facere, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 4, 4; cf.:
cum magnā calamitate et prope pernicie civitatis,
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 24, § 63:
cum summā rei publicae salute et cum tuā peste ac pernicie cumque eorum exitio, qui, etc.,
id. Cat. 1, 13, 33:
cum magno provinciae periculo,
Caes. B. G. 1, 10:
cum summo probro,
Ter. And. 5, 3, 10: cum summo terrore hominum, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24, 6:
cum summā tuā dignitate,
Cic. Fin. 4, 22, 61:
cum bonā alite,
Cat. 61, 19:
ferendum hoc onus est cum labore,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 21; cf. Cic. N. D. 2, 23, 59:
multis cum lacrimis aliquem obsecrare,
amid many tears, Caes. B. G. 1, 20; cf.:
hunc ipsum abstulit magno cum gemitu civitatis,
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 19, § 49:
orare cum lacrimis coepere,
Liv. 5, 30, 5:
si minus cum curā aut cautelā locus loquendi lectus est,
Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 6 Ritschl; so,
cum curā,
Cic. Inv. 1, 39, 70; Sall. J. 54, 1; Liv. 22, 42, 5 et saep.; cf.:
cum summo studio,
Sall. C. 51, 38:
cum quanto studio periculoque,
Liv. 8, 25, 12 al.:
cum multā venustate et omni sale,
Cic. Fin. 1, 3, 9:
summā cum celeritate ad exercitum rediit,
Hirt. B. G. 8, 52:
maximo cum clamore involant,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 89:
cum clamore,
Liv. 2, 23, 8; 5, 45, 2:
cum clamore ac tumultu,
id. 9, 31, 8; cf.:
Athenienses cum silentio auditi sunt,
id. 38, 10, 4; 7, 35, 1:
illud cum pace agemus,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 29, 83:
cum bonā pace,
Liv. 1, 24, 3; 21, 24, 5:
cum bonā gratiā,
Cic. Fat. 4, 7:
cum bonā veniā,
Liv. 29, 1, 7; cf.:
cum veniā,
Ov. Tr. 4, 1, 104; Quint. 10, 1, 72:
cum virtute vivere,
Cic. Fin. 3, 8, 29; cf. id. ib. 2, 11, 34:
cum judicio,
Quint. 10, 1, 8:
cum firmā memoriā,
id. 5, 10, 54:
legata cum fide ac sine calumniā persolvere,
Suet. Calig. 16:
spolia in aede... cum sollemni dedicatione dono fixit,
Liv. 4, 20, 3.—
b.
Attributively, with subst.:
et huic proelium cum Tuscis ad Janiculum erat crimini,
Liv. 2, 52, 7 Weissenb. ad loc.:
frumenti cum summā caritate inopia erat,
id. 2, 12, 1; 2, 5, 2; 7, 29, 3.—
2.
Cum eo quod, ut, or ne (in an amplification or limitation), with the circumstance or in the regard that, on or under the condition, with the exception, that, etc. (except once in Cic. epistt. not ante-Aug.).
(α).
Cum eo quod, with indic., Quint. 12, 10, 47 Spald.; 10, 7, 13; so,
cum eo quidem, quod, etc.,
id. 2, 4, 30. —With subj.:
sit sane, quoniam ita tu vis: sed tamen cum eo, credo, quod sine peccato meo fiat,
Cic. Att. 6, 1, 7.—
(β).
With ut:
Antium nova colonia missa cum eo, ut Antiatibus permitteretur, si et ipsi adscribi coloni vellent,
Liv. 8, 14, 8; so id. 8, 14, 2; 30, 10, 21; 36, 5, 3; Cels. 3, 22.—So with tamen:
cum eo tamen, ut nullo tempore is... non sit sustinendus,
Cels. 3, 5 fin.; 4, 6 fin. —
(γ).
With ne:
obsequar voluntati tuae cum eo, ne dubites, etc.,
Col. 5, 1, 4:
cum eo, ne amplius quam has urant,
Cels. 7, 22; and with tamen:
cum eo tamen, ne, etc.,
id. 2, 17.—
3.
Cum dis volentibus, etc., with God's help, by the will of the gods, sun theôi:
cum divis volentibus quodque bene eveniat mando tibi, Mani, etc.,
Cato, R. R. 141, 1: volentibu' cum magnis dis, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 12, 38:
agite, cum dis bene juvantibus arma capite,
Liv. 21, 43, 7; so,
cum superis,
Claud. Cons. Stil. III. p. 174.—
4.
Cum with an ordinal number (cum octavo, cum decimo, etc.) for our - fold, in economical lang., of the multiplication of cultivated products:
ut ex eodem semine aliubi cum decimo redeat, aliubi cum quinto decimo,
ten-, fifteenfold, Varr. R. R. 1, 44, 1; so,
cum octavo, cum decimo,
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 47, § 112:
cum centesimo,
Plin. 18, 10, 21, § 95; cf. with a subst.:
cum centesimā fruge agricolis faenus reddente terrā,
id. 5, 4, 3, § 24.—
D.
With a means or instrument, considered as attending or accompanying the actor in his action (so most freq. anteclass., or in the poets and scientific writers): acribus inter se cum armis confligere, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 261, 6: effundit voces proprio cum pectore, Enn. ap. Serv. ad Verg. G. 2, 424: cum voce maximā conclamat, Claud. Quadrig. ap. Gell. 9, 13, 10:
cum linguā lingere,
Cat. 98, 3:
cum suo gurgite accepit venientem (fluvius),
Verg. A. 9, 816:
cum vino et oleo ungere,
Veg. 1, 11, 8 et saep.:
terra in Augurum libris scripta cum R uno,
Varr. L. L. 5, § 21 Müll.
II.
In partic.
A.
Completing the meaning of verbs.
1.
With verbs of union, connection, and agreement: cum veteribus copiis se conjungere, Caes. B. G. 1, 37:
ut proprie cohaereat cum narratione,
Auct. Her. 1, 7, 11:
(haec) arbitror mihi constare cum ceteris scriptoribus,
id. 1, 9, 16:
interfectam esse... convenit mihi cum adversariis,
id. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cic. Inv. 1, 22, 31:
quī autem poterat in gratiam redire cum Oppianico Cluentius?
id. Clu. 31, 86:
hanc sententiam cum virtute congruere semper,
id. Off. 3, 3, 13:
foedera quibus etiam cum hoste devincitur fides,
id. ib. 3, 31, 111:
capita nominis Latini stare ac sentire cum rege videbant,
Liv. 1, 52, 4:
cum aliquo in gratiam redire,
id. 3, 58, 4:
stabat cum eo senatūs majestas,
id. 8, 34, 1:
conjurasse cum Pausaniā,
Curt. 7, 1, 6:
Autronium secum facere,
Cic. Sull. 13, 36; cf. also conecto, colligo, consentio, compono, etc.—
2.
Of companionship, association, sharing, etc.:
cum his me oblecto, qui res gestas aut orationes scripserunt suas,
Cic. de Or. 2, 14, 61:
quoniam vivitur, non cum perfectis hominibus, sed cum iis, etc.,
id. Off. 1, 15, 46:
nulla (societas) carior quam ea quae cum re publicā est unicuique nostrum,
id. ib. 1, 17, 51:
cum civibus vivere,
id. ib. 1, 34, 124:
cum M. Fabio mihi summus usus est,
id. Fam. 9, 25, 2; cf.:
cum quibus publice privatimque hospitia amicitiasque junxerant,
Liv. 1, 45, 2:
partiri cum Dinaeā matre jussit,
Cic. Clu. 7, 21:
cum Baebio communicare,
id. ib. 16, 47; cf.
of local association, nearness: cum mortuā jugulatum servum nudum positurum ait,
Liv. 1, 58, 4:
duos tamen pudor cum eo tenuit,
id. 2, 10, 5.—
3.
Of intercourse, traffic, etc.:
cum aliquo agere,
to deal with, Cic. Ac. 2, 35, 112; Caes. B. G. 1, 13:
cum eo Accius injuriarum agit,
Auct. Her. 1, 14, 24:
si par est agere cum civibus,
Cic. Off. 2, 23, 83; 3, 22, 88; id. Scaur. 10, 20; cf. id. Fam. 5, 18, 1; Liv. 1, 19, 7; 3, 9, 13; 4, 15, 2; Val. Max. 4, 3, 8:
si mihi cum Peripateticis res esset,
Cic. Ac. 2, 35, 112:
tecum enim mihi res est,
id. Rosc. Am. 30, 84:
uni tibi et cum singulis res est,
Liv. 2, 12, 11:
pacem cum Sabinis facere,
Cic. Off. 3, 30, 109.—Esp.: agere cum aliquo, to have a lawsuit with, Gai Inst. 4, 87; 4, 114 et saep.; v. ago, II. B. 8. a., and II. B. 9.; consisto, I. B. 5.; cf. also pango, etc.—
4.
Of deliberation and discussion:
haec ego cum ipsis philosophis disserebam,
Cic. de Or. 1, 13, 57:
tempus cum conjuratis consultando absumunt,
Liv. 2, 4, 3 et saep.; v. also cogito, reputo, dubito, etc.—
5.
Of strife, difference, etc.:
quibuscum continenter bellum gerunt,
Caes. B. G. 1, 1:
cum Cleanthe quam multis rebus Chrysippus dissidet!
Cic. Ac. 2, 47, 143:
neque tam quererer cum deo quod, etc.,
id. ib. 2, 25, 81:
cum quo Antiochum saepe disputantem audiebam,
id. ib. 2, 4, 11:
cum stomacheretur cum Metello,
id. Or. 2, 66, 267:
manu cum hoste confligere,
id. Off. 1, 23, 81:
utilia cum honestis pugnare,
id. ib. 3, 7, 34: cum Catone dissentire. id. ib. 3, 22, 88:
cum majoribus nostris bella gessit,
id. Scaur. 19, 45; Liv. 1, 35, 7; 7, 22, 4:
cum Auruncis bellum inire,
id. 2, 16, 8; cf.:
cum Volscis aequo Marte discessum est,
id. 2, 40, 14:
inimicitias cum Africano gerere,
Val. Max. 4, 1, 8; Sen. Vit. Beat. 2, 3:
cum Scipione dissentire,
Val. Max. 4, 1, 12:
cum utrāque (uxore) divortium fecit,
Suet. Claud. 26; cf. also certo, pugno, discrepo, differo, distraho, dissentio, etc.—
6.
Of comparison:
nec Arcesilae calumnia conferenda est cum Democriti verecundiā,
Cic. Ac. 2, 5, 14:
hanc rationem dicendi cum imperatoris laude comparare,
id. de Or. 1, 2, 8:
conferam Sullamne cum Junio,
id. Clu. 34, 94:
(orationem) cum magnitudine utilitatis comparare,
id. Off. 2, 6, 20.—
B.
Pregn., implying the notion of being furnished, endowed, clothed with any thing, or of possessing, holding, suffering under, etc., in a lit. and trop. sense: ille vir haud magnā cum re sed plenus fidei, Enn. ap. Cic. Sen. 1, 1 (cf. the antith.:
hominem sine re, sine fide,
Cic. Cael. 32, 78):
a portu illuc nunc cum laternā advenit,
Plaut. Am. prol. 149:
cadus cum vino,
id. Stich. 5, 1, 7; cf. id. Pers. 2, 3, 15:
olla cum aquā,
Cato, R. R. 156:
arcula cum ornamentis,
Plaut. Most. 1, 3, 91:
fiscos cum pecuniā Siciliensi,
Cic. Verr. 1, 8, 22:
onerariae naves cum commeatu,
Liv. 30, 24, 5 et saep.:
cum servili schemā,
Plaut. Am. prol. 117;
so of clothing,
id. Rud. 1, 4, 31; Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 24, § 54; 2, 5, 13, § 31; [p. 490] id. Rab. Post. 10, 27; Liv. 35, 34, 7; Suet. Claud. 13; Sil. 1, 94 et saep.:
ut ne quis cum telo servus esset,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 3, § 7;
so of weapons,
id. Phil. 2, 8, 19; cf.:
inmissi cum falcibus, etc.,
id. Tusc. 5, 23, 65:
vidi argenteum Cupidinem cum lampade,
holding, id. Verr. 2, 2, 47, § 115:
simulacrum Cereris cum faucibus,
id. ib. 2, 4, 49, §
109: cum elephanti capite puer natus,
Liv. 27, 11, 5; cf.:
cum quinque pedibus natus,
id. 30, 2, 10; 33, 1, 11; 27, 4, 14 al.: omnia cum pulchris animis Romana juventus, Enn. ap. Don. ad Ter. Phorm. 3, 1, 1; cf.
Ter. ib.: Minucius cum vulnere gravi relatus in castra,
Liv. 9, 44, 14:
te Romam venisse cum febri,
Cic. Att. 6, 9, 1; so id. de Or. 3, 2, 6; id. Clu. 62, 175: cum eisdem suis vitiis nobilissimus, with all his faults, i. e. in spite of, id. ib. 40, 112:
ex eis qui cum imperio sint,
id. Fam. 1, 1, 3 Manut.; cf.:
cum imperio aut magistratu,
Suet. Tib. 12 Bremi; v. imperium.—
C.
With idem (never of the identity of two subjects, but freq. of the relation of two subjects to the same object, etc.;
v. Krebs, Antibarb. p. 538): tibi mecum in eodem est pistrino vivendum,
Cic. de Or. 2, 33, 144:
quandoque tu... omnibus in eisdem flagitiis mecum versatus es,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 80, § 187:
Numidae... in eādem mecum Africā geniti,
Liv. 30, 12, 15; 28, 28, 14; Tac. A. 15, 2; Val. Max. 6, 5, 3.—
D.
In the adverb. phrase, cum primis, with the foremost, i.e. especially, particularly (rare), Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 28, § 68; id. Brut. 62, 224.—Post-class. also as one word: cumprīmis, Gell. 1, 12, 7 al.
► a.
Cum in anastrophe. So always with the pers. pron.: mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, etc.; cf. Cic. Or. 45, 154; Prisc. pp. 949 and 988 P.; and in gen. with the rel. pron.:
quocum (quīcum), quacum, quibuscum, quīcum (for quocum),
Cic. Or. 45, 154; Liv. 38, 9, 2; Cic. Att. 5, 1, 4; id. Verr. 2, 2, 31, §§ 76 and 77; Caes. B. G. 1, 8; Cic. Rep. 1, 10, 15; id. Att. 4, 9, 2; id. Off. 1, 35, 126; Quint. 8, 6, 65; 10, 5, 7; 11, 2, 38. But where cum is emphatic, or a demonstrative pron. is understood, cum is placed before the rel.; cf.:
his de rebus velim cum Pompeio, cum Camillo, cum quibus vobis videbitur, consideretis,
Cic. Fam. 14, 14, 3:
adhibuit sibi quindecim principes cum quibus causas cognovit,
id. Off. 2, 23, 82; Liv. 1, 45, 2.—
b.
Before et... et, connecting two substt.:
cum et diurno et nocturno metu,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 23, 66.
III.
In compounds the primitive form com was alone in use, and was unchanged before b, p, m: comburo, compono, committo, and a few words beginning with vowels: comes, comitium, and comitor; m was assimilated before r: corripio; often before l: colligo or conligo; rarely before n, as connumero, but usually dropped: conecto, conitor, conubium; with the change of m into n before all the remaining consonants: concutio, condono, confero, congero, conqueror, consumo, contero, convinco; so, conjicio, etc., but more usually conicio; and with the rejection of m before vowels and before h: coarguo, coëo, coinquino, coopto, cohibeo.—
B.
It designates,
1.
A being or bringing together of several objects: coëo, colloquor, convivor, etc.: colligo, compono, condo, etc.—
2.
The completeness, perfecting of any act, and thus gives intensity to the signif. of the simple word, as in commaculo, commendo, concito, etc., comminuo, concerpo, concido, convello, etc.
2.
Cum (ante-class. quom; freq. in MSS. of Cicero; the post-class. form quum is incorrectly given in many MSS. and edd.), conj. [pronom. stem ka- or kva- with acc. case ending].
I.
Of time, when, as, while, sometimes = after, since.
A.
In adverbial clauses dependent on non-preterite predicates.
1.
The time designated by cum being indefinite, when, if, whenever, always with indic., except in the instances A. 2.
a.
Cum with pres. indic., often equivalent to si.
(α).
With principal predicate in pres.:
nam omnes id faciunt quom se amari intellegunt,
Plaut. Truc. prol. 17:
facile, quom valemus, recta consilia aegrotis damus,
Ter. And. 2, 1, 9; Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 44; id. Poen. 4, 2, 20; id. Truc. 1, 1, 46; Ter. Phorm. 2, 1, 11:
cum semen maturum habet, tum tempestiva est,
Cato, R. R. 17; 41: quid? tum cum es iratus, permittis illi iracundiae dominationem animi tui? Cic. Rep. 1, 38, 59:
cum permagna praemia sunt, est causa peccandi,
id. Off. 3, 20, 79; id. de Or. 3, 23, 87:
quidam vivere tunc incipiunt cum desinendum est,
Sen. Ep. 23, 11.—
(β).
With principal predicate in fut. (rare):
ad cujus igitur fidem confugiet cum per ejus fidem laeditur cui se commiserit?
Cic. Rosc. Am. 40, 116; id. Leg. 3, 10, 24; id. Fl. 17, 40; Verg. A. 12, 208.—
(γ).
With principal predicate in logical perf. (mostly poet.):
haud invito ad auris sermo mi accessit tuos, Quom te postputasse omnis res prae parente intellego,
Ter. Hec. 3, 5, 33:
qui cum levati morbo videntur, in eum de integro inciderunt,
Cic. Fam. 12, 30, 2:
(dolor) Cum furit... Profuit incensos aestus avertere ( = prodest),
Verg. G. 3, 457:
nemo non, cum alteri prodest, sibi profuit,
Sen. Ep. 81, 19; Cic. Att. 4, 18, 1; Liv. 8, 8, 11; Verg. A. 9, 435; id. G. 1, 288.—
b.
With logical perf. indic.
(α).
With principal predicate in pres. (very freq.), the perf. translated either by English pres. perf. or by pres.: omnia sunt incerta cum a jure discessum est, when we ( once) disregard the law, Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 1:
gubernatores cum exultantes loligines viderunt... tempestatem significari putant,
id. Div. 2, 70, 145:
cum depulsi sunt agni a matribus, diligentia adhibenda est ne, etc.,
Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17:
cum ejus generis copia defecit, ad innocentium supplicia descendunt,
Caes. B. G. 6, 16, 5:
(hostis) cum intravit... modum a captivis non accipit,
Sen. Ira, 1, 8, 2:
quia enim, cum prima cognovi, jungere extrema cupio,
Plin. Ep. 7, 10, 1; Cic. Or. 1, 33, 153; id. Div. 2, 26, 56; id. Brut. 24, 93; id. Cat. 4, 6, 12; id. Fam. 6, 3, 3; Auct. Her. 4, 50, 63; Caes. B. G. 4, 33; 5, 21; Liv. 22, 9, 8; 34, 31, 4; Val. Max. 8, 10 prooem.; 9, 6 init.; Sen. Ep. 3, 2; 21, 9; id. Cons. Helv. 13, 2; Curt. 3, 3, 18; Plin. 18, 7, 10, § 60; Quint. 4, 2, 122; 10, 7, 14.—In oblique clauses the perf. indic. may remain, or may be changed into perf. subj., even after preterites, Cic. Off. 1, 28, 26; 2, 20, 69.—
(β).
With principal predicate in fut. ( poet.), Ov. P. 1, 5, 47.—
(γ).
With two logical perff. (rare):
cum id factum est, tamen grex dominum non mutavit,
Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 6:
quae cum se disposuit... summum bonum tetigit,
Sen. Vit. Beat. 8, 5; id. Tranq. 17, 11; id. Ben. 1, 1, 5. —
c.
With fut.
(α).
With principal predicate in fut.:
ita fere officia reperientur, cum quaeretur, quid deceat, etc.,
Cic. Off. 1, 34, 125; Auct. Her. 2, 7, 10; 2, 12, 17.— So with principal predicate in fut. imper:
etiam tum cum verisimile erit aliquem commisisse... latratote,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 20, 57, id. Mur. 31, 65; id. Att. 3, 8, 4; Liv. 35, 19, 6.—
(β).
With principal predicate in pres.:
in talibus... stabilitas amicitiae confirmari potest, cum homines cupiditatibus imperabunt,
Cic. Lael. 22, 82; Val. Max. 4, 8 prooem.—
d.
With fut. perf.
(α).
With principal predicate in pres.:
quam (spem), cum in otium venerimus, habere volumus,
Cic. Att. 1, 7:
nec irascimur illis cum sessorem recusaverint,
Sen. Const. 12, 3; id. Cons. Marc. 7, 2.—
(β).
With principal predicate in fut. indic.:
cum haec erunt considerata, statim nostrae legis expositione... utemur,
Auct. Her. 2, 10, 15:
cum viderit secari patrem suum filiumve, vir bonus non flebit?
Sen. Ira, 1, 12, 1.—In oblique clauses, dependent on preterites, it is changed to the pluperf. subj.:
qui tum demum beatum terrarum orbem futurum praedicavit cum aut sapientes regnare, aut reges sapere coepissent,
Val. Max. 7, 2, ext. 4.—
(γ).
With principal predicate in fut. imper.:
cum tempestates pluviae fuerint, videtote quot dies, etc.,
Cato, R. R. 2, 3; 25 init.; 38.—
(δ).
With two fut. perff.:
cum bene cesserit negotiatio, multum militia retulerit,
Sen. Cons. Helv. 10, 6.—
e.
In partic.
(α).
In definitions with pres, indic.:
humile genus est (causae) cum contempta res adfertur,
Auct. Her. 1, 3, 5:
purgatio est cum factum conceditur, culpa removetur,
Cic. Inv. 1, 11, 15: maxima est capitis deminutio cum aliquis simul et civitatem et libertatem amittit, Gai Inst. 1, 160; Auct. Her. 1, 46; 2, 4, 6; 4, 12, 17; 4, 53, 66 et saep. —
(β).
Etiam cum (less freq. cum etiam), even when (nearly = etiamsi), always with indic. if dependent on other than preterite predicates. (1) With pres.: qui cavet ne decipiatur, vix cavet, quom etiam cavet, Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 5:
in quo scelere, etiam cum multae causae convenisse... videntur, tamen non temere creditur,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 22, 62:
qui incolunt maritimas urbis, etiam cum manent corpore, animo tamen excursant,
id. Rep. 2, 4, 7; Curt. 6, 3, 10; Plin. Ep. 1, 8, 6.—(2) With fut.:
etiam cum potentes nocere intendent,
Sen. Const. 4, 1. —(3) With fut. perf.:
cum etiam plus contenderimus, etc.,
Cic. Fam. 1, 8, 7; Sen. Ben. 4, 13, 3.—(4) In oblique clauses with imperf. subj., Cic. Fragm. Tog. Cand. 15.—
(γ).
Anteclass. with indic. in addressing indefinite persons in rules, after imper.:
sorba in sapa cum vis condere, arida facias,
Cato, R. R. 7 fin. — Always with indic. if a certain person is addressed; cf. Cic. Rep. 1, 38, 59 (l. A. 1. a. a supra); id. Verr. 2, 1, 18, § 47.—
2.
With subj. referring to indefinite time.
a.
With the 2d pers. sing., used in an indefinite sense ( you = one, any one).
(α).
With pres. subj.:
acerbum'st pro benefactis quom mali messim metas,
Plaut. Ep. 5, 2, 53:
quom faciem videas, videtur esse quantivis preti,
Ter. And. 5, 2, 15; Plaut. Cas. 3, 2, 32; id. Bacch. 3, 3, 38; id. Merc. 3, 2, 7 and 8 et saep.:
difficile est tacere cum doleas,
Cic. Sull. 10, 31:
etiam interpretatio nominis habet acumen cum ad ridiculum convertas,
id. de Or. 2, 63, 257; 2, 64, 259; 2, 67, 269; 2, 75, 305; 3, 38, 156; Sen. Ep. 75, 4 et saep.—
(β).
With perf. subj.:
difficile est cum praestare omnibus concupieris, servare aequitatem,
Cic. Off. 1, 19, 64:
quos (versus) cum cantu spoliaveris, nuda paene remanet oratio,
id. Or. 55, 183; id. Lael. 21, 77; id. Inv. 1, 47, 88; Sall. C. 12, 3; 51, 24; 58, 16.—
b.
In the jurists, in a clause exemplifying a general rule: cum ergo ita scriptum sit Heres Titius esto, addicere debemus, Gai Inst. 2, 165; so id. ib. 4, 97; 3, 161; Auct. Her. 4, 31, 42.—
c.
In the phrase audio cum dicat (I. F. 1, b. infra):
saepe soleo audire Roscium cum ita dicat se, etc.,
Cic. de Or. 2, 28, 129.—
d.
When, after cum, an imperfect or pluperfect is used as a logical tense (post-Aug.): non tulit gratis qui cum rogasset accepit, who has asked for the favor, and, etc., Sen. Ben. 2, 1, 4; 2, 3, 1; 2, 13, 2; id. Ep. 86, 8.—
e.
If the principal predicate is a potential subjunctive, an indefinite clause with a present or future after cum is always in the same mood:
caveto quom ventus siet aut imber, effodias aut seras,
Cato, R. R. 28:
quis tam dissoluto animo est qui, haec cum videat, tacere ac neglegere possit?
Cic. Rosc. Am. 11, 32; id. Planc. 39, 94; id. Clu. 55, 153; id. Inv. 1, 4, 87; 1, 51, 95; Auct. Her. 4, 6, 9; 4, 32, 43.—
3.
Of definite time, always with indic. (for exceptions, v. 4. infra), when, if, while (for the distinction between cum and si, cf.:
formam mihi totius rei publicae, si jam es Romae, aut cum eris, velim mittas,
Cic. Att. 6, 3, 4:
quae si prodierit, atque adeo cum prodierit—scio enim proditurum esse—audiet,
id. Rosc. Am. 25, 100:
si damnatus eris, atque adeo cum damnatus eris—nam dubitatio quae poterit esse? etc.,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 29, § 70; id. Or. 2, 75, 304; Sen. Ep. 83, 10).
a.
Cum with pres. indic.
(α).
Principal predicate in pres.:
certe, edepol, quom illum contemplo et formam cognosco meam... nimis simili'st mei,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 288; so id. Poen. 1, 2, 71; id. Pers. 4, 4, 15; Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 45: Py. Ne fle. Ph. Non queo Quom te video, Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 14; id. Am. 1, 1, 260; id. Rud. 3, 4, 38:
potestne tibi ulla spes salutis ostendi cum recordaris in deos immortalis quam impius... fueris?
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 18, § 47: cum hoc vereor, et cupio tibi... parcere, rursus immuto voluntatem meam ( = while), id. Rosc. Am. 34, 95; Serv. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 4:
equidem cum... recordor, vix aetatem Alexandri suffecturam fuisse reor ad unum bellum,
Liv. 9, 19, 12; Cic. Planc. 12, 29; id. Clu. 10, 29; Liv. 40, 46, 3:
quod cum ita est,
if this is so, Quint. 24, 58 (cf.:
quodsi ita est,
Cic. Mur. 2, 5); so,
often, nunc cum: qui modo nusquam conparebas, nunc quom conpares, peris,
Plaut. Aul. 4, 4, 2; so id. ib. 1, 3, 35; 2, 2, 17; id. As. 1, 2, 18; Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 39:
nos de injusto rege nihil loquimur, nunc cum de ipsa regali re publica quaerimus,
Cic. Rep. 3, 35, 47; Liv. 44, 39, 7.—So with logical perf. for the pres., Quint. 4, 2, 122.—But Cicero always uses nunc cum with a subj. when the clause, while designating present time, generally [p. 491] in opposition to a former time, implies a reason for the principal action, now that:
quodsi tum, cum res publica severitatem desiderabat, vici naturam, etc., nunc cum omnes me causae ad misericordiam... vocent, quanto tandem studio, etc.,
Cic. Mur. 2, 3, 6; id. Fam. 9, 16, 7; id. Font. 15, 35 (25); id. Imp. Pomp. 10, 27; 17, 50; not found in later writers, except in the Gallic panegyrists, e. g. Eum. Grat. Act. 2 init. —
(β).
With principal predicate in the logical perf., if (ante-class.):
Curculio hercle verba mihi dedit quom cogito,
Plaut. Curc. 4, 4, 27:
sed tandem, quom recogito, qui potis est scire, haec scire me?
id. Stich. 2, 1, 29; id. Mil. 4, 8, 64.—
b.
Cum with logical perf. indic.
(α).
Principal predicate in pres.:
ergo quom optume fecisti, nunc adest occasio Benefacta cumulare,
after doing excellently, Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 63: quo etiam major vir habendus est (Numa), cum illam sapientiam constituendae civitatis duobus prope saeculis ante cognovit, quam, etc. ( = siquidem, if he has; seeing that he has), Cic. de Or. 2, 37, 154; Verg. A. 9, 249.—
(β).
With principal predicate in fut. ( poet.):
at cumst imposta corona, Clamabis capiti vina subisse meo (est imposta = erit imposta),
Prop. 4 (5), 2, 30.—
c.
With fut.
(α).
With principal predicate in fut.:
quom videbis tum scies,
Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 37; id. Am. 3, 3, 15; id. Men. 5, 7, 7; Ter. Phorm. 1, 2, 82; id. Heaut. prol. 33:
sed cum certum sciam faciam te paulo ante certiorem,
Cic. Fam. 9, 23; 3, 11, 3; 12, 30, 5; 14, 3, 4; id. Q. Fr. 3, 8, 2; Liv. 3, 53, 10.—
(β).
With principal predicate in fut. perf.:
cum tu haec leges, ego jam annuum munus confecero,
Cic. Fam. 2, 12, 1.—
(γ).
With principal predicate in imper. fut.:
mox quom imitabor Sauream, caveto ne succenseas,
Plaut. As. 2, 2, 105; id. Mil. 3, 3, 59.—
(δ).
With principal predicate in subj. (potential):
cum testes ex Sicilia dabo, quem volet ille eligat,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 22, § 48; id. Off. 1, 34, 122; 3, 10, 46; id. Att. 4, 9, 1; 4, 10, 2; 4, 17, 1 et saep.—
(ε).
In oblique clauses, after preterites, changed into imperf. subj., Caes. B. C. 2, 40; after other tenses it is either changed into pres. subj. or remains unchanged, Cic. Fam. 1, 56, 2; 1, 7, 4; Sall. C. 58, 8.—
d.
With fut. perf.
(α).
With principal predicate in fut.:
mox dabo quom ab re divina rediero,
Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 193; id. Am. 1, 1, 43; 1, 2, 4; Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 8:
cum haec docuero, tum illud ostendam, etc.,
Cic. Clu. 4, 9; id. Verr. 2, 1, 1, § 3; id. de Or. 2, 33, 143; 2, 59, 239; id. Att. 3, 23, 5 et saep.—In oblique clauses, after preterites, the fut. perf. is changed into pluperf. subj., Cic. Rosc. Am. 10, 28; 28, 78; Liv. 1, 56, 11; 5, 30, 1; after other tenses, and often in oblique oration, it remains unchanged, or is changed into perf. subj., Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 71, § 183; id. Fam. 2, 5, 2 dub.; Liv. 21, 13, 8; 3, 56, 10.—
(β).
With principal predicate in imper. (almost always fut. imper.):
quod quom dixero, si placuerit, Facitote,
Ter. Eun. 5, 8, 37:
cum ego Granium testem produxero, refellito, si poteris,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 59, § 154; id. Marcell. 9, 27; id. Fam. 16, 4, 3; Tac. A. 1, 22.—With pres. imper., Liv. 24, 38, 7.—
(γ).
With principal predicate in subj. (potential):
quae cum omnia collegeris, tum ipse velim judices satisne videatur,
Cic. Fam. 5, 2, 4; id. Or. 13, 41 dub.—In oblique clauses, after non-preterites, the fut. perf. remains unchanged:
oro, ne me hodie, cum isti respondero, putetis, etc.,
Cic. Phil. 2, 5, 10; id. Clu. 2, 6.—
4.
With subj. in definite time.
a.
Sometimes in oblique construction (3. c. e; 3. d. a).—
b.
Sometimes by attraction:
curata fac sint quom a foro redeam domum,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 3, 6; 2, 3, 11; id. Stich. 1, 2, 8; id. Curc. 2, 2, 3:
non admirere cum ego ipse me id ex te primum audisse confitear?
Cic. Planc. 24, 58. —
c.
In the semi-causal connection nunc cum, v. 3, a. a fin. supra.
B.
In adverbial anterior clauses dependent on preterite predicates, the time of the cum clause preceding that of the principal sentence (always with subj., except in the instances mentioned 2.; 3. a; and 5.), when, after.
1.
With pluperf. subj. (so generally): quom socios nostros mandisset impius Cyclops, Liv. And. Fragm. ap. Prisc. 8, p. 817 (Lubbert conjectures, without sufficient reason, mandit sex): quom saucius multifariam ibi factus esset, tamen volnus capiti nullum evenit, Cato, Orig. ap. Gell. 3, 7, 19:
portisculus signum cum dare coepisset,
Enn. Ann. v. 234 Vahl.:
quom testamento patris partisset bona,
Afran. Com. Rel. v. 50 Rib.: quem quom ibi vidissent Hortensius Postumiusque, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 4, 32; Enn. Ann. v. 241 Vahl.; Turp. Com. Rel. v. 48 Rib.; Lucil. ap. Non. p. 394, 27 (the MSS. reading:
quom venisset,
Plaut. As. 2, 3, 15, is corrupt):
audivi summos homines cum quaestor ex Macedonia venissem Athenas,
Cic. de Or. 1, 11, 45:
haec cum Crassus dixisset, silentium est consecutum,
id. ib. 1, 35, 160:
cum Thebani Lacedaemonios bello superavissent... aeneum statuerunt tropaeum,
id. Inv. 2, 23, 69:
Dionysius cum fanum Proserpinae Locris expilavisset, navigabat Syracusas,
id. N. D. 3, 34, 83:
eo cum venisset, animadvertit ad alteram ripam magnas esse copias hostium,
Caes. B. G. 5, 18:
Tarquinius et Tullia minor... cum domos vacuas novo matrimonio fecissent, junguntur nuptiis,
Liv. 1, 46, 9 et saep. —
2.
With pluperf. indic.
a.
Ante-class. in place of the class. subj.:
idem me pridem quom ei advorsum veneram, Facere atriensem voluerat,
Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 28:
Quid ais? Quom intellexeras, id consilium capere, quor non dixti extemplo,
Ter. And. 3, 2, 38.—
b.
If the pluperfect is a virtual imperfect, designating the time at which the main action took place, the principal predicate being likewise in the pluperfect, when the clause would require an indicative if placed in the imperfect (3. a. a): exspectationem nobis non parvam adtuleras cum scripseras Varronem tibi confirmasse, etc. ( = exspectabam cum legebam; cf. C. 3, a. a, 2.), Cic. Att. 3, 18, 1; cf. Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 9, 2, where the cum clause is relative; v. E.: Romae haud minus terroris... erat quam fuerat biennio ante cum castra Punica objecta Romanis moenibus fuerant (C. 3. a. a, 1.), Liv. 27, 44, 1; so id. 5, 28, 1; 26, 40, 17; 44, 10, 1.—
c.
If the clause indicates that the time of the main action is a period, subsequent to that of the action designated by the pluperfect:
nam tum cum in Asia res magnas permulti amiserant, scimus Romae, solutione impedita, fidem concidisse,
Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:
cum ea consecutus nondum eram... tamen ista vestra nomina numquam sum admiratus,
id. Fam. 3, 7, 5; id. Verr. 2, 5, 69, § 178; id. Inv. 2, 42, 124; Caes. B. G. 7, 35; Liv. 24, 7, 1 sq.; Nep. Dat. 6, 5; Curt. 9, 10, 12; Verg. A. 5, 42.—
3.
If both predicates denote repeated action, the anterior clause with cum has the pluperf. indic. or subj.
a.
With pluperf. indic.
(α).
With principal predicate in imperf. indic. (so almost always in Cicero and Caesar; not in the poets, nor in Vell., Val. Max., Tac., Suet., or Plin.), whenever:
cum ad aliquod oppidum venerat, eadem lectica usque ad cubiculum deferebatur,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11, § 27; 2, 1, 46, § 120; 2, 3, 67, § 156; 2, 4, 61, § 137; 2, 5, 10, § 27; id. Fl. 7, 16; 10, 21; id. Agr. 2, 26, 68; id. Or. 32, 113; id. Brut. 24, 93:
(Cassi vellaunus) cum equitatus noster se in agros ejecerat, essedarios ex silvis emittebat,
Caes. B. G. 5, 19; 3, 14; 3, 15; 4, 7; 5, 35; 7, 22; id. B. C. 1, 58; Sall. J. 92, 8; 44, 4:
cum comminus venerant, gladiis a velitibus trucidabantur,
Liv. 38, 21, 12; Nep. Epam. 3, 6; Sen. Ep. 11, 4; Curt. 3, 10, 8; 3, 10, 11; Quint. 7, 1, 4; Gell. 15, 22, 5; 17, 18, 3; Gai Inst. 4, 15; Pacat. 9.—
(β).
With principal predicate in perf. indic.:
Pacuvius qui Syriam usu suam fecit, cum vino... sibi parentaverat,
Sen. Ep. 12, 8; 108, 14.—
b.
With pluperf. subj., an imperf. indic. in principal sentence:
cum fossam latam cubiculari lecto circumdedisset, ejusque transitum... conjunxisset, eum ipse detorquebat,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 20, 59; id. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 94:
cum cohortes ex acie procucurrissent, Numidae... effugiebant, etc.,
Caes. B. C. 2, 41:
cum in jus duci debitorem vidissent, undique convolabant,
Liv. 2, 27, 8; 25, 3, 11; 5, 48, 2.—
4.
In anterior clauses with imperf. subj.
(α).
When the principal clause expresses an immediate consequence ( = pluperf. subj.):
Demaratus cum audiret dominationem Cypseli confirmari, defugit patriam ( = cum audivisset),
Cic. Rep. 2, 19, 34; Caes. B. G. 5, 17 et saep.—
(β).
Where both verbs relate to one transaction, especially in remarks and replies:
(Epaminondas) cum gravi vulnere exanimari se videret, quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus, etc.,
Cic. Fin. 2, 30, 97:
cum ex eo quaereretur quid esset dolus magnus, respondebat, etc.,
id. Off. 3. 14, 60; id. Or. 2, 69, 278; id. Rosc. Am. 25, 70; Liv. 3, 71, 4 et saep.—
(γ).
When the principal action takes place during the action of the dependent clause:
qui cum unum jam et alterum diem desideraretur, neque in eis locis inveniretur... liberti Asuvii in eum invadunt, etc.,
Cic. Clu. 13, 38.—
5.
For the perf. indic. instead of pluperf. subj. v. C. 1. d. infra.
C.
In adverbial clauses of coincident time dependent on preterites ( = eo tempore quo), the clause with cum designating the time at which or during which the main action took place, when, as, while.[The theory of the use of tenses and moods in these clauses is not fully settled. The older grammarians require the indicative if cum denotes pure time, but the subjunctive if denoting cause or relations similar to cause. Zumpt and others acknowledge that the rule is frequently not observed, attributing this to the predilection of the Latin language for the subjunctive. Recently Hoffmann (Zeitpartikeln der Lateinischen Sprache, 1st ed. 1860; 2d ed. 1873) and Lubbert (Syntax von Quom, 1870) have advanced the theory that cum requires the indicative if denoting absolute time, but the subjunctive if denoting relative time. They define absolute time as time co-ordinate or parallel with, or logically independent of, the time of the principal action, which performs the function of a chronological date for the principal action, and they consider it as a criterion that the clause might have constituted an independent sentence; while relative time is logically subordinate to the principal action. Hoffmann condenses his theory in the following words: cum with indicative names and describes the time at which the action of the principal sentence took place; cum with the subjunctive, on the contrary, designates the point of time at which, or the space of time during which, the action expressed in the principal sentence commenced or ended. The chief objections to this theory are: (1) Its vagueness.—(2) The facts that in many instances cum with the subjunctive clearly dates the main action (C. 3. a. b, 2, and 4.; C. 3. a. 5.; C. 3. b. b, 3. and 5.; C. 3. b. g infra); that many of the subjunctive clauses with cum may be transformed into independent sentences (C. 3. b. b, 2. and 3. infra); that many indicative clauses with cum are logically subordinate to the main action (C. 3. a. a, 2. infra), and that when both moods are used in two co-ordinated clauses with cum belonging to the same main sentence, Hoffmann must account for the difference of the moods by explanations not drawn from his theory (Cic. Agr. 2, 64, 64; id. Clu. 30, 83; id. Div. 1, 43, 97; id. Fin. 2, 19, 61; id. de Or. 67, 272; Caes. B. C. 2, 17; Liv. 6, 40, 17; 30, 44, 10).—(3) The impossibility of clearly drawing the line between logical co-ordination and subordination; and the fact that, wherever it is drawn, there will be many passages not accounted for (cf. 1. init. and many passages under C. 3. a. a, 3.; C. 3. a. d; C. 3. b. g, etc.).—(4) That the supposed use of cum with the imperfect indicative is inconsistent with the received doctrine that the imperfect always designates a time relative to another time—a difficulty not satisfactorily met by Hoffman's assumption of an aoristic imperfect.]GENERAL RULE.—The predicate after cum is in the perfect indicative (or historical present) if the action is conceived as a point of time coincident with the time of the main action. It is either in the imperfect indicative or in the imperfect subjunctive if the action is conceived as occupying a period of time within which the main action took place (e. g.:
quid enim meus frater ab arte adjuvari potuit, cum... furem se videre respondit? Quid in omni oratione Crassus... cum pro Cn. Plancio diceret?
Cic. de Or. 2, 54, 220;
where dicebat might stand for diceret, but not responderet for respondit: cum ad tribum Polliam ventum est, et praeco cunctaretur, etc.,
Liv. 29, 37, 8; cf.:
cum tecum Ephesi collocutus sum,
Cic. Fam. 13, 55, 1; and:
cum te Puteolis prosequerer,
id. ib. 3, 10, 8: cum primum lex coepta ferri est, Liv 3, 14, 4; and: cum [p. 492] ferretur lex, id. 5, 30, 4;
also,
Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 1, and Liv. 3, 58, 7).
1.
Both predicates in the perf. indic. (or histor. pres.), both clauses denoting points of time (the principal predicate may be in any verbal form implying a perfect).
a.
The clause expressing a momentary action:
posticulum hoc recepit quom aedis vendidit, Flaut. Trin. 1, 2, 157: scilicet qui dudum tecum venit cum pallam mihi Detulisti,
id. Men. 2, 3, 46; prol. 62; id. Poen. 4, 2, 82; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 57; id. Heaut. 2, 3, 21 et saep.:
non tum cum emisti fundum Tusculanum, in leporario apri fuerunt,
Varr. R. R. 3, 3, 8:
in judiciis quanta vis esset didicit cum est absolutus,
Cic. Tog. Cand. Fragm. 4:
per tuas statuas vero cum dixit, vehementer risimus,
id. de Or. 2, 59, 242:
cum occiditur Sex. Roscius, (servi) ibidem fuerunt,
id. Rosc. Am. 41, 120; id. Verr. 2, 2, 29, § 70; 1, 4, 11; 2, 2, 66, § 160; 2, 3, 47, § 112; id. Caecin. 29, 85; id. Sest. 55, 157; id. Phil. 2, 9, 21; id. Rep. 6, 22, 24; id. Fam. 9, 15, 2; id. Att. 2, 1, 5 et saep.:
tunc flesse decuit cum adempta sunt nobis arma,
Liv. 3, 55, 10; 10, 6, 8; 28, 42, 14; 42, 46, 1; Vitr. 2, 8, 12; 2, 1, 7; 2, 9, 15;
6, 7, 4: semel dumtaxat vultum mutavit, tunc cum... anulum in profundum dejecit,
Val. Max. 6, 9, 6; 8, 8, ext. 1; 9, 1, ext. 1;
9, 8, 1: rerum natura... cum visum est deinde, (filium tuum) repetiit,
Sen. Cons. Polyb. 10, 4; 11, 2; id. Q. N. 1, 11, 3; 6, 25, 4:
accepimus et serpentem latrasse cum pulsus est regno Tarquinius,
Plin. 8, 41, 63, § 153; 2, 24, 22, § 90; 2, 52, 53, § 139; Suet. Claud. 21; Hor. S. 2, 3, 61; Ov. Tr. 5, 11, 8; Tib. 3, 5, 18; Mart. 5, 49, 9.—So, cum primum, when first, the first time that, as soon as:
jube vinum dari: jam dudum factum'st quom primum bibi,
Plaut. As. 5, 2, 40; id. Cas. prol. 17; Ter. Hec. alt. prol. 31; id. And. prol. 1; id. Eun. 3, 3, 4:
Pompeius cum primum contionem habuit... ostendit, etc.,
Cic. Verr. 1, 15, 45; id. Fam. 2, 9, 1; Liv. 3, 55, 10; 25, 6, 2; 25, 29, 4; 31, 3, 1; 40, 8, 1; 42, 34, 3; Curt. 6, 11, 23; but with imperf. subj. when referring to a per. of time:
ipse cum primum pabuli copia esse inciperet, ad exercitum venit,
Caes. B. G. 2, 2.—In the poets and later writers, the imperf. subj. often occurs where classic prose has the perf. indic.:
effice ut idem status sit cum exigis qui fuit cum promitterem,
Sen. Ben. 4, 39, 4:
tum lacrimare debueras cum equo calcaria subderes,
Curt. 7, 2, 6; Suet. Claud. 6; Ov. P. 4, 12, 28.—
b.
If the clause denotes a state, condition, or action of longer duration, it takes the perf. indic. if asserted as a complete fact without regard to what happened during its progress (virtual point of time):
in quem Juppiter se convertit cum exportavit per mare... Europen,
Varr. R. R. 2, 5, 5:
ne cum in Sicilia quidem (bellum) fuit... pars ejus belli in Italiam ulla pervasit,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6:
nempe eo (lituo) Romulus regiones direxit tum cum urbem condidit,
id. Div. 1, 17, 30; id. Verr. 2, 3, 54, § 125; id. Lig. 7, 20; id. Rep. 3, 32, 44:
non tibi, cum in conspectu Roma fuit, succurrit? etc.,
Liv. 2, 40, 7; 34, 3, 7; Nep. Iphicr. 2, 4; id. Pelop. 4, 3.—
c.
With perf. indic., by the time when, before, referring to facts which actually occurred before the action of the principal sentence:
ab Anaximandro moniti Lacedaemonii sunt ut urbem... linquerent, quod terrae motus instaret, tum cum... urbs tota corruit,
Cic. Div. 1, 50, 112; Liv. 22, 36, 4; 34, 31, 15; Prop. 2, 32 (3, 30), 53.—
d.
With perf. indic. when actions in immediate sequence are represented as coincident:
ad quem cum accessimus, Appio, subridens, Recipis nos, inquit, etc.,
Varr. R. R. 3, 2, 2:
me primus dolor percussit, Cotta cum est expulsus,
Cic. Brut. 89, 303:
itaque ne tum quidem cum classem perdidisti, Mamertinis navem imperare ausus es,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59:
haec cum facta sunt in concilio, magna spe et laetitia omnium discessum est,
Caes. B. C. 3, 87:
cum Thessalos in armis esse nuntiatum est, Ap. Claudium... senatus misit,
Liv. 42, 5, 8:
Gracchus cum ex Sardinia rediit, orationem ad populum habuit,
Gell. 15, 12, 1; Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 2; id. Deiot. 6, 17; id. Top. 16, 61; id. Div. 1, 43, 98; id. Fam. 5, 21, 2; Liv. 4, 44, 10; 4, 60, 8; 9, 25, 2; 22, 14, 12; Nep. Dat. 11, 1; Suet. Caes. 31; Gell. 1, 23, 5; Prop. 3, 20, 37 (4, 21, 7).—Hence a perf. indic. in co-ordination with pluperf. subj.: cum sol nocte visus esset... et cum caelum discessisse visum est (decemviri ad libros ire jussi sunt), Cic. Div. 1, 43, 97.—
2.
With a perf. indic. (or histor. pres.), the principal predicate in imperf.
a.
The action falling within the time of the principal predicate:
set Stalagmus quojus erat tunc nationis, quom hinc abit?
Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 107; id. Rud. 3, 6, 9; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 51:
haec Crassi oratio cum edita est, quattuor et triginta tum habebat annos, etc.,
Cic. Brut. 43, 161:
eo cum venio, praetor quiescebat,
id. Verr. 2, 4, 14, § 32; 2, 5, 69, § 178; id. Fl. 13, 20; id. Pis. 1, 2; id. Lig. 1, 3; id. Phil. 2, 21, 52; 3, 4, 11; id. Fam. 13, 35, 2; id. Att. 6, 1, 13:
cum Caesari in Galliam venit, alterius factionis principes erant Aedui, alterius Sequani,
Caes. B. G. 6, 12; Sall. J. 71, 1:
cum haec accepta clades est, jam C. Horatius et T. Menenius consules erant,
Liv. 2, 51, 1; 21, 39, 4; 23, 49, 5; 28, 27, 14; 34, 16, 6;
45, 39, 1: merito me non adgnoscis, nam cum hoc factum est, integer eram,
Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 3.—Post-class. writers generally use imperf. subj.:
beneficium ei videberis dedisse cui tunc inimicissimus eras cum dares?
Sen. Ben. 5, 19, 7:
bona quoque, quae tunc habuit cum damnaretur, publicabuntur,
Dig. 28, 18, § 1:
pauper Fabricius (erat) Pyrrhi cum sperneret aurum,
Claud. IV. Cons. Hon. 413.—
b.
The action strictly anterior to the principal sentence, rare (1. d.): nam quod conabar cum interventum'st dicere, nunc expedibo, Pac. ap. Non. p. 505, 3 (Trag. Rel. v. 65 Rib.):
cum est ad nos adlatum de temeritate eorum, etc., cetera mihi facillima videbantur... multaque mihi veniebant in mentem, etc.,
Cic. Fam. 3, 10, 1; Sall. C. 51, 32; Verg. A. 6, 515; id. E. 3, 14.—
3.
The predicate after cum conceived as a period or space of time (including repeated action) is either in the imperf. indic. or imperf. subj. [In ante-classical writers and Cicero the imperf. indic. very frequent, and largely prevailing over the subj., except that when the principal predicate denotes a point of time (with perf.), Cicero commonly uses the subj.; the imperf. indic. occurs in Cicero 241 times; in Caesar once with the force of a relativeclause (B. G. 1, 40, 5), and 3 times of repeated action; in Nep. once of repeated action (Att. 9, 6); in Sall. twice (J. 31, 20; id. H. 1, 48, 6 Dietsch); in Liv. 22 times; in Verg. 4 times; in Ovid twice; in Tib. twice; in Prop. 3 times; in Val. Max. twice; then it disappears (except once each in Tac. and Mart.), but reappears in Gaius (3 times), Gellius (twice), and the Gallic panegyrists (several times)].
a.
Both predicates denoting spaces of time, the principal predicate always in the imperf. indic. unless the mood is changed by other influences.
(α).
Cum with the imperf. indic. (1) In express or implied opposition to other periods of time, esp. with tum or tunc:
eademne erat haec disciplina tibi quom tu adulescens eras?
Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 17:
alium esse censes nunc me atque olim quom dabam?
Ter. And. 3, 3, 13; Plaut. Capt. 2, 1, 50; id. Most. 1, 3, 64; id. Mil. 2, 2, 26; Ter. And. 1, 1, 69; Enn. ap. Cic. Brut. 19, 76 (Ann. v. 222 Vahl.):
qui cum plures erant, paucis nobis exaequari non poterant, hi postquam pauciores sunt, etc.,
Auct. Her. 4, 18, 25:
qui (Pompeius) cum omnes Caesarem metuebamus ipse eum diligebat, postquam ille metuere coepit, etc.,
Cic. Att. 8, 1, 4:
res per eosdem creditores per quos cum tu aderas agebatur,
id. Fam. 1, 1, 1 (cf.:
Senatus consultum factum est de ambitu in Afranii sententiam quam ego dixeram cum tu adesses,
id. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 3):
Trebellium valde jam diligit: oderat tum cum ille tabulis novis adversabatur,
id. Phil. 6, 4, 11:
non tam id sentiebam cum fruebar, quam tunc cum carebam,
id. Red. Quir. 1, 3:
etenim tunc esset hoc animadvertendum cum classis Syracusis proficiebatur,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 43, § 111 (so 111 times in Cicero, including the instances where the principal predicate is in the perf.):
cum captivis redemptio negabatur, nos vulgo homines laudabant, nunc deteriore condicione sumus, etc.,
Liv. 25, 6, 14; 10, 7, 2; 33, 34, 3; 34, 4, 10; 44, 36, 8; 45, 38, 1; Ov. P. 2, 6, 9; id. M. 13, 473; Val. Max. 6, 3, 1; 4, 1, 10; Mart. 12, 70, 10; Gai Inst. 1, 184; Eum. Grat. Act. 6; cf.: cur eum, cum in consilium iretur, Cluentius et Canutius abesse patiebantur? Cur cum in consilium mittebant, Stajenum judicem qui pecuniam dederant, non requirebant? Cic. Clu. 30, 83 (cum iretur, of the time when the judges retired; cum mittebant, of the previous time, when the parties were asked about the closing of the case; opp. cum iretur).—Poets, even in the class. per., sometimes use the subj. in dependence upon the indic.:
hic subito quantus cum viveret esse solebat, Exit humo,
Ov. M. 13, 441. —(2) The principal predicate denoting a mental act or reflection occasioned by, or accompanying the action of the clause with cum (mostly ante-class. and in Cicero):
desipiebam mentis cum illa scripta mittebam tibi,
Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 35; id. Aul. 2, 2, 1; id. Ps. 1, 5, 86:
sed tu cum et tuos amicos in provinciam quasi in praedam invitabas, et cum eis praedabare, et... non statuebas tibi rationem esse reddendam?
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 11, § 29:
illas res tantas cum gerebam, non mihi mors, non exsilium ob oculos versabatur?
id. Sest. 21, 47; id. Cat. 3, 1, 3; 3, 7, 16; id. Verr. 2, 2, 10, § 26; 2, 2, 13, § 33; 2, 2, 35, § 86; 2, 3, 86, § 198; 2, 5, 21, § 54; id. Fl. 1, 1; id. Deiot. 1, 3; 8, 23; id. Pis. 24, 56 and 57; id. Ac. 2, 28, 89; id. Or. 13, 41; id. Tusc. 2, 15, 43; id. Fam. 7, 9, 5 (22 times); Sall. H. 1, 48, 6 Dietsch (cf.:
num P. Decius cum se devoveret, et equo admisso in mediam aciem Latinorum inruebat, aliquid... cogitabat?
Cic. Fin. 2, 19, 61; cum se devoveret explains the circumstances of inruebat; hence acc. to 3. a. b, 2. in subj.; cf. Madv. ad loc., who reads devoverat).—(3) If the predicate after cum has a meaning peculiar to the imperf. indic., which by the use of the subj. would be effaced: quod erat os tuum, cum videbas eos homines, quorum ex bonis istum anulus aureus donabas? (descriptive imperf.) Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 80, § 187; so,
fulgentis gladios hostium videbant Decii, cum in aciem eorum inruebant,
id. Tusc. 2, 24, 59: cum de plebe consulem non accipiebat ( = accipere nolebat, conative imperf.), id. Brut. 14, 55:
cum vim quae esset in sensibus explicabamus, etc.,
id. Ac. 2, 12, 37 (the verbum dicendi refers to a certain stage in the discourse, for which Cicero uses the imperf. indic. in independent sentences, e. g. N. D. 3, 29, 71; 3, 6, 15; de Or. 1, 53, 230; 2, 19, 83; 2, 84, 341); so,
equidem... risum vix tenebam, cum Attico Lysiae Catonem nostrum comparabas,
id. Brut. 8, 293:
cum censebam,
id. de Or. 1, 62, 264:
cum dicebam,
id. Fam. 6, 1, 5:
cum ponebas,
id. Fin. 2, 19, 63; so esp. in Cicero's letters the phrase cum haec scribebam = while I am writing this, to preserve the meaning of an epistolary tense, referring to a state, condition, or action in progress at the time of writing the letter:
res, cum haec scribebam, erat in extremum adducta discrimen,
id. Fam. 12, 6, 2; 3, 12, 2; 5, 12, 2; 6, 4, 1; id. Att. 5, 20, 5 et saep.; cum haec scriberem, scripsissem, scripsi, are not epistolary tenses, but refer to events happening after the letter or part of it was finished, = when I wrote, had written, id. ib. 2, 15, 3; 10, 4, 7; 4, 10, 2; id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 6, § 19; Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 6, 5; 8, 13, 2;
sometimes cum dabam = cum scribebam,
Cic. Fam. 12, 16, 3 (but cf.:
cum scriberem, as epistolary tense, in oblique discourse,
id. Att. 15, 13, 7).—(4) The coincidence in time of two actions is made emphatic, = eo ipso tempore quo:
tum cum insula Delos... nihil timebat, non modo provinciis sed etiam Appia via jam carebamus,
Cic. Imp. Pomp. 18, 55; id. Phil. 1, 15, 36; 13, 8, 17; id. Sull. 10, 31; id. Tusc. 2, 8, 20; id. Off. 3, 27, 100; id. Dom. 45, 118.—
(β).
The predicate after cum is in the imperf. subj. (1) To impart to the clause a causal, adversative or concessive meaning besides the temporal relation:
antea cum equester ordo judicaret, improbi magistratus in provinciis inserviebant publicanis (a logical consequence),
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 94:
sed cum jam honores (Hortensii) et illa senior auctoritas gravius quiddam requireret, remanebat idem (dicendi genus) nec decebat idem,
id. Brut. 95, 327; id. Phil. 1, 1, 1; id. Rosc. Am. 15, 42; 16, 45; id. Pis. 10, 2; Liv. 25, 13, 1; 26, 5, 1.—(2) To indicate circumstances under which the main action took place, and by which it is explained:
Flaminius, cum tripudio auspicaretur, pullarius diem differebat, etc.,
Cic. Div. 1, 35, 77: [p. 493] equidem cum peterem magistratum, solebam in prensando dimittere a me Scaevolam, id. de Or. 1, 24, 112; id. Inv. 2, 17, 52; Liv. 41, 1, 2 (cf. 3. b. b, 3.).—(3) To describe the locality of the main action: quom essem in provincia legatus, quam plures ad praetores et consules vinum honorarium dabant, Cato ap. Isid. Orig. 20, 3, 8:
Zenonem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter,
Cic. N. D. 1, 21, 59; 1, 28, 79; id. Tusc. 2, 14, 34; id. Fam. 3, 8, 5; id. Att. 2, 11, 1; 12, 5, 4; 16, 14, 1; id. Verr. 2, 4, 12, § 29; Liv. 5, 54, 3 (cf. 3. b. b, 4.).—(4) To designate the time of the main action as a condition:
cum ageremus vitae supremum diem, scribebamus hoc,
Cic. Fin. 4, 27, 54:
cum jam in exitu annus esset, Q. Marcius... magistratu abiturus erat,
Liv. 39, 23, 1 (cf. 3. b. b, 5.).—
(γ).
If both the clause with cum and the principal predicate denote repeated action, the predicate with cum in class. prose is in the imperf. indic. or subj. according to the rules under a and b; the principal predicate being always in the imperf. indic.; but in ante-class. writers cum has always the imperf. indic. (1) Imperf. indic.:
tum mi aedes quoque arridebant, quom ad te veniebam, tuae,
Plaut. As. 1, 3, 55; id. Am. 1, 1, 45; id. Rud. 4, 7, 25 sqq.; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 19; Cinc. de Re Mil. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 5; Asell. ap. Gell. 2, 13, 4; Cic. Att. 2, 7, 4; id. Verr. 2, 2, 13, § 34; Caes. B. C. 1, 79, 2; Gai Inst. 2, 101; Pacat. Pan. 9 fin.:
cum a nostro Catone laudabar vel reprehendi me a ceteris facile patiebar,
Cic. Or. 13, 41; so Nep. Att. 9, 6.—To distinguish from adversative relations, as Cic. Rosc. Com. 3, 9; id. Att. 12, 39, 2; id. de Or. 1, 14, 62; Caes. B. C. 3, 44, 6; Gai Inst. 2, 254.—If only the clause with cum, but not the principal predicate, denotes repeated action, the latter is in the perf., the former in imperf. indic., Caes. B. C. 2, 17; Cic. Arch. 5, 10.—(2) Imperf. subj., mostly denoting circumstances to explain the main action: cum dilectus antiquitus fieret... tribunus militaris adigebat, etc., Cinc. de Re Mil. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 2:
Hortensius cum partiretur tecum causas, prorogandi locum semper tibi relinquebat,
Cic. Brut. 51, 190; id. Div. 1, 45, 102; id. de Or. 1, 54, 232; id. Brut. 62, 222; Liv. 3, 66, 2; 5, 25, 12:
ex hoc effectos panes, cum in colloquiis Pompeiani famem nostris objectarent, vulgo in eos jaciebant (causal),
Caes. B. C. 3, 48; Cic. Fin. 2, 19, 62; so,
according to class. usage,
Sen. Ep. 86, 11; Curt. 5, 2, 7; 6, 5, 18; 7, 3, 13; Suet. Caes. 65;
contrary to class. usage,
Val. Max. 3, 6, 6; Sen. Ep. 30, 7; 77, 8; Tac. H. 2, 91; Spart. Had. 18. —
(δ).
In other instances (which are rare), both moods occur, either without any discrimination, or for special reasons. (1) Ante-class.:
nam quom modo exibat foras, ad portum se aibat ire,
Plaut. Rud. 2, 2, 2. —(2) Class.:
ut, cum L. Opimii causam defendebat, C. Carbo nihil de Gracchi nece negabat, sed id jure factum esse dicebat,
Cic. de Or. 2, 25, 106 (cf.:
nuper cum ego C. Sergii Oratae... causam defenderem, nonne omnis nostra in jure versata defensio est?
id. ib. 1, 39, 178; in each of these sentences the clause with cum sustains exactly the same relation to the principal predicate; but the former has the imperf. in the principal sentence, and in this connection Cic. prefers the indic. after cum):
similiter arbitror... illum (oratorem) de toto illo genere non plus quaesiturum esse, quid dicat, quam Polycletum illum, cum Herculem fingebat, quem ad modum pellem aut hydram fingeret (fingebat, for euphony, in view of the foll. fingeret),
id. de Or. 2, 16, 70; cf.:
nec vero ille artifex cum faceret Jovis formam... contemplabatur aliquem, e quo similitudinem duceret,
id. Or. 2, 9.—Without assignable reason:
casu, cum legerem tuas litteras, Hirtius erat apud me,
Cic. Att. 15, 1, 2; cf.:
Hasdrubal tum forte cum haec gerebantur, apud Syphacem erat,
Liv. 29, 31, 1:
cum haec Romae agebantur, Chalcide Antiochus ipse sollicitabat civitatium animos, etc.,
id. 36, 5, 1; cf.:
cum haec in Hispania gererentur, comitiorum jam appetebat dies,
id. 35, 8, 1 (Weissenb. gerebantur):
cum haec agebantur, Chalcide erat Antiochus,
id. 36, 15, 1; cf.:
cum haec agerentur jam consul via Labicana ad fanum Quietis erat,
id. 4, 41, 8; 35, 2, 1.—(3) PostAug. writers almost always use imperf. subj., disregarding the class. usage: ipsa fruebatur arte cum pingeret (cf. a, 2.), Sen. Ep. 9, 7; id. Cons. Marc. 23, 3; Plin. Pan. 34:
tunc erat mendacio locus cum ignota essent externa... nunc vero, etc. (opposition of times),
Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 24; so id. Ep. 97, 9; Mart. 2, 61, 1; cf. Don. ad Ter. And. 3, 3, 13 (3. a. a, 1. supra):
cum haec proderem habebant et Caesares juvenes sturnum, etc.,
Plin. 10, 41, 59, § 120.—
b.
If the principal predicate denotes a point of time, and the predicate with cum a period of time, the former is in the perf. indic. unless changed by construction; the latter
(α).
In the imperf. indic., according to the rules a. a, except 2. (1) When the time of the cum clause is opposed to other periods of time:
res quom animam agebat tum esse offusam oportuit,
Plaut. Trin. 4, 3, 85; id. Truc. 4, 2, 20; id. Ep. 3, 3, 50 (3, 4, 21); id. Most. 5, 1, 68:
quod cum res agebatur nemo in me dixit, id tot annis post tu es inventus qui diceres?
Cic. Phil. 2, 9, 22; id. Rep. 2, 23, 43; id. Div. 1, 41, 92; 1, 45, 101; id. Ac. 2, 28, 90; id. Quint. 19, 60; 17, 54; 19, 61; id. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 210 et saep.; Liv. 22, 60, 25; Verg. A. 4, 597; Tib. 1, 10, 8; 1, 10, 19; Prop. 2, 1, 31; 5 (4), 10, 24.—The subj. may be used if the principal action is represented as a consequence or result:
o, Astaphium, haut isto modo solita's me ante appellare, Sed blande, quom illuc quod aput vos nunc est, aput me haberem,
Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 60 (Lubbert conjectures habebam); Cic. Off. 2, 1, 2 and 3; id. Fin. 4, 27, 54; id. Rosc. Am. 4, 11; id. Verr. 2, 3, 57, § 130; id. Mur. 3, 8; Liv. 5, 53, 9; 10, 6, 9; 43, 21, 1;
44, 39, 7.— Hence the mood may change in co-ordinate clauses: tum, cum haberet haec res publica Luscinos, Calatinos, etc., homines... patientia paupertatis ornatos, et tum, cum erant Catones, Phili, etc., tamen hujusce modi res commissa nemini est (haberet, concessive),
Cic. Agr. 2, 24, 64.—(2) To make emphatic the coincidence of time, = eo ipso tempore (a. a, 4.):
cum is triumphus de Liguribus agebatur, Ligures... coloniam ipsam ceperunt,
Liv. 41, 14, 1; Cic. Sest. 26, 56; id. Phil. 2, 36, 90; id. Div. 2, 1, 3; id. Verr. 2, 5, 37, § 97; id. Att. 1, 4, 1.—(3) To preserve the peculiar force of the imperf. indic. (a. a, 3.): cum iste jam decedebat, ejus modi litteras ad eos misit, etc. (conative imperf.), Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 70, § 172:
cum Africanus censor tribu movebat centurionem... inquit,
id. de Or. 2, 67, 272 (cf.:
cum (censor) M. Antistio equum ademisset,
id. ib. 2, 71, 287).—
(β).
With the imperf. subj. (1) Always when cum means while (time during which): quomque caput caderet, carmen tuba sola peregit et, etc., Enn. ap. Lact. ad Stat. Th. 11, 56 (Ann. v. 508 Vahl.):
magistratus quom ibi adesset, occepta'st agi,
Ter. Eun. prol. 22 (Lubbert conjectures adsedit); Enn. ap. Macr. S. 6, 1 (Ann. v. 106 Vahl.):
Alexandrum uxor sua, cum simul cubaret, occidit,
Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 144:
armati, cum sui utrosque adhortarentur... in medium inter duas acies procedunt,
Liv. 1, 25, 1; Varr. R. R. 2, 81; Auct. Her. 4, 52, 65; Cic. Brut. 3, 10; id. Clu. 62, 175; Caes. B. G. 2, 19; id. B. C. 3, 57; Liv. 1, 30, 8; 10, 30, 3 et saep.—(2) To connect a logical (causal, etc.) relation with the temporal meaning (a. b, 1.):
cum ille Romuli senatus... temptaret ut ipse gereret sine rege rem publicam, populus id non tulit,
Cic. Rep. 2, 12, 23:
an pater familiarissimis suis succensuit cum Sullam et defenderent et laudarent? (causal),
id. Sull. 17, 49:
tum cum bello sociorum tota Italia arderet, homo non acerrimus... C. Norbanus in summo otio fuit (concessive),
id. Verr. 2, 5, 4, § 8:
quibus rebus cum unus in civitate maxime floreret, incidit in eandem invidiam, etc. (adversative),
Nep. Cim. 3, 1:
sed cum jam appropinquantium forma lemborum haud dubia esset... tunc injecta trepidatio est,
Liv. 44, 28, 10; Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 211; id. Clu. 31, 84; id. Mur. 3, 8; id. Phil. 3, 2, 3; id. Tusc. 1, 2, 4; Auct. Her. 4, 24, 33; Caes. B. C. 2, 7; Liv. 25, 9, 10; 21, 41, 12.—(3) To explain the main fact by circumstances:
quem quidem hercle ego, in exilium quom iret, redduxi domum,
Plaut. Merc. 5, 4, 19:
consule me, cum esset designatus tribunus, obtulit in discrimen vitam suam,
Cic. Sest. 28, 61:
haec epistula est, quam nos, in aedibus Apronii cum litteras conquireremus, invenimus,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 66, § 154: Socrates, cum XXX. tyranni essent, pedem porta non extulit, id. Att. 8, 2, 4:
Brundusii cum loquerer cum Phania, veni in eum sermonem ut dicerem, etc.,
id. Fam. 3, 5, 3:
itaque, cum populum in curias triginta divideret, nomina earum (Sabinarum) curiis imposuit,
Liv. 1, 13, 6:
Ap. Claudius, ovans cum in urbem iniret, decem milia pondo argenti, etc., in aerarium tulit,
id. 41, 28, 6; Cic. Clu. 20, 55; id. Phil. 12, 8, 20; id. Scaur. 47; id. Inv. 2, 31, 96; id. Tusc. 2, 22, 53; id. Div. 1, 52, 119; id. Off. 2, 8, 27; id. Or. 2, 55, 225 sq.; id. Fam. 1, 9, 13; 6, 6, 5; Liv. 1, 39, 4; 3, 63, 6; 4, 53, 11 et saep.—(4) To describe the place of the main action (a. a, 3.):
cum essem in castris ad fluvium Pyramum, redditae mihi sunt uno tempore a te epistulae duae,
Cic. Fam. 3, 11, 1;
so with cum essem (essemus, etc.),
id. ib. 2, 19, 1; 3, 4, 1; 13, 56, 1; id. Att. 1, 10, 1; 14, 19, 1; id. Ac. 1, 1, 1; id. Rep. 1, 39, 61; Varr. R. R. 3, 13; Caes. B. G. 4, 11 et saep.:
Eumenes rex ab Roma cum in regnum rediret... mactatus est ( = on the journey),
Liv. 42, 40, 8:
Agesilaus cum ex Aegypto reverteretur... in morbum implicitus decessit,
Nep. Ages. 8, 6.—The perf. indic. (cum fui, etc.) refers to temporary visits to a place:
Gallo narravi, cum proxime Romae fui, quid audissem,
Cic. Att. 13, 49, 2:
proxime cum in patria mea fui, venit ad me, etc.,
Plin. Ep. 4, 13, 3.—(5) To designate the time by natural occurrences (a. a, 4.):
ipsi comprehensi a me, cum jam dilucesceret, deducuntur,
Cic. Cat. 3, 3, 6:
cum advesperasceret, cum lucesceret,
id. Fam. 15, 4, 8:
cum lux appropinquaret,
id. Tull. 9, 21:
cum dies instaret,
id. Inv. 2, 31, 96:
cum comitiorum tempus adpeteret,
Liv. 28, 10, 1:
cum dies comitiorum adpropinquaret,
id. 3, 34, 7; 10, 13, 2.—But when a date is given as a point of time, the perf. indic. is used:
cum ea dies venit,
Liv. 4, 44, 10; 6, 20, 4.—(6) When the action of the cum clause is interrupted or ended by the main action:
cum hanc jam epistulam complicarem, tabellarii a vobis venerunt, etc.,
Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 5, § 17:
L. Octavius, cum multas jam causas diceret, adulescens est mortuus,
id. Brut. 68, 241:
cum plures jam tribus dicto esse audientem pontifici duumvirum juberent... ultimum de caelo quod comitia turbaret intervenit,
Liv. 40, 42, 10:
cum maxime conquereretur apud patres... repente strepitus ante curiam... auditur,
id. 8, 33, 4:
haec cum maxime dissereret, intervenit Tarquinius,
id. 1, 50, 7;
so with cum maxime,
Cic. Fam. 1, 5, a, 2; Liv. 23, 24, 6; 30, 33, 12.—(7) If the clause with cum has the force of a participial adjunct of the principal predicate (cum diceret = dicens, or dicendo):
Caesarem saepe accusavit, cum adfirmaret illum numquam, dum haec natio viveret, sine cura futurum ( = adfirmans, or adfirmando),
Cic. Sest. 63, 132:
Antigonus in proelio, cum adversus Seleucum dimicaret, occisus est ( = dimicans),
Nep. Reg. 3, 2:
impulit ut cuperem habere, cum diceret,
Varr. R. R. 3, 2, 8; Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9 (11), 3; id. Clu. 42, 119; 56, 153; id. pro Corn. Maj. Fragm. 16; id. Mil. 5, 12; id. de Or. 1, 57, 243; id. Or. 37, 129; id. Fin. 1, 5, 16; id. Inv. 2, 34, 105; Val. Max. 1, 2, ext. 1; Ov. P. 1, 9, 42.—(8) In the historians, in a summary reference to events already related:
cum haec in Achaia atque apud Dyrrhachium gererentur... Caesar mittit, etc.,
Caes. B. C. 3, 57:
cum civitas in opere ac labore adsiduo reficiendae urbis teneretur, interim Q. Fabio... dicta dies est,
Liv. 6, 1, 6:
cum hic status in Boeotia esset, Perseus... misit,
id. 42, 56, 10; 33, 36, 1; 34, 22, 3; 38, 8, 1; 42, 64, 1; 45, 11, 1.—
(γ).
In all other cases the imperf. subj. is regularly used in class. prose, even if the action of the clause with cum is logically independent of the principal sentence:
illum saepe audivi, hic, cum ego judicare jam aliquid possem, abfuit,
Cic. Brut. 71, 248: senatus consultum est factum de ambitu in Afranii sententiam, in quam ego dixeram, cum tu adesses. id. Q. Fr. 2, 7 (9), 3; so always (class.) with cum maxime, precisely when, just when:
cum maxime haec in senatu agerentur, Canuleius... (ad populum) ita disseruit,
Liv. 4, 3, 1:
cum maxime Capua circumvallaretur, Syracusarum oppugnatio ad finem venit,
id. 25, 23, 1.—In a very few instances the imperf. indic. occurs without apparent reason: an vero cum honos agebatur familiae vestrae... succensuit [p. 494] pater tuus cum Sullam defenderent (probably to distinguish the two cum clauses), Cic. Sull. 17, 49 (cf.:
cum jus amicitiae, societatis, adfinitatis ageretur, cum, etc., eo tempore tu non modo non... retulisti, sed ne ipse quidem, etc.,
id. Quint. 16, 53):
ille versus, qui in te erat collatus cum aedilitatem petebas,
id. Q. Fr. 1, 3, 8:
cum ex oppido exportabatur (Dianae statua) quem conventum mulierum factum esse arbitramini?... Quid hoc tota Sicilia est clarius quam omnes convenisse cum Diana exportaretur ex oppido? etc.,
id. Verr. 2, 4, 35, § 77.—Poets and post-class. writers frequently disregard the class. usage, the former by using either mood instead of the other, the latter by the un-Ciceronian use of the subj.; v. Prop. 2, 9, 15; 5 (4), 4, 10; Tib. 1, 10, 16; Verg. A. 7, 148; 12, 735; Mart. 13, 122; Curt. 8, 12, 16; 9, 2, 24; Quint. 11, 1, 89; Plin. 36, 6, 5, § 46; Dig. 28, 1, 22, § 1; Gell. strangely uses an imperf. indic. where class. writers would use a subj.:
sed ego, homines cum considerabam, alterum fidei, alterum probri plenum, nequaquam adduci potui ad absolvendum,
Gell. 14, 2, 10; cf.:
cum secum reputavit,
Tac. A. 15, 54.
D.
In adverbial clauses denoting identity of action (if the principal sentence and the clause with cum denote not different actions, but one action, which, expressed by the latter clause, is by the principal sentence defined in its meaning and import, the clause with cum always takes the indic., except once or twice post-class., and almost always the same tense as the principal sentence), when, by, in, etc.
1.
The predicate in present:
amice facis Quom me laudas,
Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 31; id. Poen. 3, 2, 12; 3, 5, 15; Ter. And. prol. 18; id. Ad. 1, 2, 16 et saep.:
bene facitis cum venitis,
Auct. Her. 4, 50, 63:
quae cum taces, nulla esse concedis,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 19, 54; 21, 58; id. Clu. 47, 132; Liv. 25, 6, 5 et saep.—
2.
With fut. (rare):
cum igitur proferent aliquid hujusmodi... inventum proferent,
Cic. Inv. 1, 40, 75; id. Fl. 39, 99; Plin. Ep. 7, 24, 9.—
3.
With fut. perf. (rare):
quod cum dederis, illud dederis ut is absolvatur,
Cic. Div. in Caecil. 7, 23; id. Lig. 12, 36; id. Part. Or. 39; Auct. Her. 4, 30, 41.—
4.
With perf.:
fecisti furtum quom istaec flagitia me celavisti et patrem,
Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 60; 1, 2, 52; id. Cas. 4, 4, 18 (22); id. Capt. 2, 3, 52; Ter. Phorm. prol. 32 et saep.:
loco ille motus est cum ex urbe est depulsus,
Cic. Cat. 2, 1, 1; id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59; id. Fam. 11, 29, 2; id. Rosc. Am. 14, 39; Liv. 5, 49, 8; 9, 8, 4; Val. Max. 3, 7, ext. 1; Curt. 6, 10, 9; Quint. 1, 10, 47 et saep.—
5.
With histor. pres.:
Orestes cum se defendit, in matrem confert crimen,
Auct. Her. 1, 15, 25.—
6.
With imperf.:
cum grandiorem aetatem ad consulatum constituebant, adulescentiae temeritatem verebantur,
Cic. Phil. 5, 17, 47; 14, 10, 28; id. Fl. 33, 83; id. Lig. 6, 18; id. Fam. 6, 1, 3; id. Off. 3, 10, 40; id. Sen. 6, 15 et saep.—
7.
Imperf. with perf. ( poet. and post-class.;
very rare): quid quod et ominibus certis prohibebar amori Indulgere meo, tum cum mihi ferre jubenti Excidit et fecit spes nostras cera caducas,
Ov. M. 9, 595 sq.; Val. Max. 9, 1, 5.—
8.
With pluperf. (very rare):
exspectationem nobis non parvam attuleras cum scripseras, etc.,
Cic. Att. 3, 18, 1; id. Sest. 16, 37.—
* 9.
Pluperf. and imperf.:
quod quidem tibi ostenderam cum a me Capuam reiciebam,
Cic. Att. 8, 11, D, 5.—
10.
Imperf. subj. (post-class.):
tunc venena edebat bibebatque, cum immensis epulis non delectaretur tantum, sed gloriaretur,
Sen. Cons. Helv. 10, 10.—
11.
Often relatively added to nouns when a relative clause must be supplied:
illa scelera... cum ejus domum evertisti, cujus, etc.,
which you committed when (by), Cic. Pis. 34, 83; id. Imp. Pomp. 12, 33; id. Verr. 2, 5, 13, § 33; Liv. 5, 3, 4; 23, 9, 11; 29, 17, 9.
E.
In relative clauses, = quo tempore, quo, etc.
1.
Dependent on nouns designating time, the mood follows the general rules of relative clauses.
a.
The principal sentence is a formal statement of indefinite time, with the copula (tempus fuit cum, or fuit cum, analogous to sunt qui, etc.); generally with subj., but sometimes indic., when sunt qui would take this mood.
(α).
With pres. or fut. indic.: nunc est profecto (i. e. tempus), interfici quom perpeti me possum (the ante-class. writers construe sunt qui with indic.), Ter. Eun. 3, 5, 3; id. And. 1, 1, 125:
jam aderit tempus quom sese etiam ipse oderit,
Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 12; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 28.—
(β).
With pres. subj.: nunc est ille dies quom gloria maxima sese nobis ostendat, si vivimus, sive morimur, Enn. ap. Prisc. 10, p. 880 P. (Ann. v. 383 Vahl.); so Plaut. Capt. 3, 3, 1:
erit illud profecto tempus et illucescet aliquando dies cum... amicissimi benevolentiam desideres,
Cic. Mil. 25, 69; Val. Max. 6, 2, 9.—
(γ).
With preterites, indic., Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 29:
fuit quoddam tempus cum in agris homines bestiarum more vagabantur,
Cic. Inv. 1, 2, 2 (cf.:
fuerunt alia genera qui... dicebant,
id. de Or. 3, 17, 62):
fuit cum hoc dici poterat (potuisset would be hypothetical),
Liv. 7, 32, 13.—
(δ).
With preterites, subj., Ter. Heaut. 5, 4, 1:
quod fuit tempus cum rura colerent homines,
Varr. R. R. 3, 1:
ac fuit cum mihi quoque initium requiescendi concessum arbitrarer,
Cic. Or. 1, 1, 1; so id. Brut. 2, 7; Caes. B. G. 6, 24.—
b.
Attributively with nouns denoting time (tempus, dies, etc.), in ordinary sentences.
(α).
With pres. or fut. indic.:
incidunt saepe tempora cum ea commutantur,
Cic. Off. 1, 10, 31:
longum illud tempus cum non ero, etc.,
id. Att. 12, 8, 1; id. Verr. 2, 5, 69, § 177; id. Quint. 2, 8; id. Sen. 23, 84.—With potential subj., Cic. Att. 3, 3.—
(β).
With past tenses, indic., Plaut. Am. prol. 91; id. rud. 2, 6, 12; Ter. And. 5, 3, 12:
atque ille eo tempore paruit cum parere senatui necesse erat,
Cic. Lig. 7, 20:
memini noctis illius cum... pollicebar,
id. Planc. 42, 101; id. Phil. 2, 18, 45; 2, 35, 88; id. Imp. Pomp. 15, 44; id. Sest. 7, 15; 29, 62; id. Sull. 18, 52; id. Fam. 11, 8, 1; 11, 27, 3; id. de Or. 1, 11, 45; Sall. J. 31, 20; Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 6; Prop. 1, 10, 5; 1, 22, 5; Gell. 1, 23, 2 et saep.—So with nouns implying time:
illa pugna quom, etc. ( = in qua),
Plaut. Poen. 2, 26;
Marcellino Consule, cum ego... putabam ( = anno Marcellini, quo, etc.),
Cic. Att. 9, 9, 4:
patrum nostrorum memoria cum exercitus videbatur ( = tempore quo),
Caes. B. G. 1, 40; Cic. Fam. 13, 1, 2; Liv. 6, 40, 17.—
(γ).
With preterites in subj., Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 30:
accepit enim agrum iis temporibus cum jacerent pretia praediorum,
Cic. Rosc. Com. 12, 33; so id. Off. 2, 19, 65:
numerandus est ille annus cum obmutuisset senatus?
id. Pis. 12, 26; so id. Verr. 2, 4, 35, § 77; id. Rep. 2, 37, 62; id. Font. 3, 6; Liv. 3, 65, 8:
haec scripsi postridie ejus diei cum castra haberem Mopsuhestiae (cf. habebam, as epistolary tense),
Cic. Fam. 3, 8, 10.—If the clause does not define the noun, but is a co-ordinate designation of time, it follows the rule of adverbial clauses:
eodem anno, cum omnia infida Romanis essent, Capuae quoque conjurationes factae,
while, Liv. 9, 26, 5; Cic. Rep. 2, 36, 61; id. de Or. 2, 3, 12; Liv. 8, 15, 1; 1, 41, 6.—
c.
Appositively added to temporal adverbs and to dates (heri, hodie, medius, tertius, olim, antea, quondam, nuper, olim, postea) following the rules of adverbial clauses:
Crassus hodie, cum vos non adessetis, posuit idem, etc.,
Cic. de Or. 2, 10, 41:
omnia quae a te nudius tertius dicta sunt, cum docere velles, etc.,
id. N. D. 3, 7, 18; id. Sest. 48, 103; id. Att. 4, 3, 2; id. Inv. 2, 1, 1; id. Rep. 1, 39, 61; Caes. B. C. 2, 17 et saep.—So with dates (always subj.. except with cum haec scribebam, or dabam):
posteaquam Pompeius apud populum ad VIII. Id. Febr., cum pro Milone diceret, clamore convicioque jactatus est,
Cic. Fam. 1, 5, b, 1; 3, 3, 1; 3, 4, 1; 4, 2, 1; id. Att. 14, 19, 1.—
2.
The principal sentence defines a period of time during which the action of the clause has or had lasted, always with indic., and after the words defining the period, = per quod tempus, when, that, during which, while, etc.
a.
With pres., = Engl. pres. perf.
(α).
With cardinal, definite or indefinite. (1) Time in acc. (ante-class.):
hanc domum Jam multos annos est quom possideo,
that I have been the owner, Plaut. Aul. prol. 4; cf. id. Merc. 3, 1, 37.—(2) Time in nom.:
anni sunt octo cum ista causa in ista meditatione versatur,
Cic. Clu. 30, 82; id. Or. 51, 171; id. Fam. 15, 14, 1; id. Div. 2, 36, 76.—
(β).
With ordinals:
vigesimus annus est, cum omnes scelerati me unum petunt,
Cic. Phil. 12, 10, 24; Verg. A. 5, 627; 3, 646.—
(γ).
With diu:
jam diu'st quom ventri victum non datis,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 146; Gell. 1, 25, 12.—
b.
Perf. with negation, the principal predicate in pres. or logical perf., = Engl. pres. perf.:
quia septem menses sunt quom in hasce aedes pedem Nemo intro tetulit,
Plaut. Most. 2, 2, 39; id. Men. 3, 1, 3; Prop. 3, 8, 33 (2, 16, 33. —
c.
With pluperf., the principal predicate in imperf.:
permulti jam anni erant cum inter patricios magistratus tribunosque nulla certamina fuerant,
Liv. 9, 33, 3.—
d.
With imperf., the principal predicate in perf. or pluperf.:
dies triginta aut plus in ea navi fui, Quom interea semper mortem exspectabam miser,
Ter. Hec. 3, 4, 7:
unus et alter dies intercesserat, cum res parum certa videbatur,
Cic. Clu. 26, 72.—
3.
The principal sentence specifying a period of time which has or had elapsed since the action took place, = ex ejus tempore, since or after, always with indic.; the principal predicate pres. or logical perf., cum with perf. indic.
a.
With cardinals.
(α).
Time in acc. (ante-class.):
annos factum'st sedecim Quom conspicatus est primo crepusculo Puellam exponi,
Plaut. Cas. prol. 39; so probably id. Pers. 1, 3, 57; id. Trin. 2, 4, 1; id. Merc. 3, 1, 37.—
(β).
With nom.:
nondum centum et decem anni sunt cum de pecuniis repetundis lata lex est,
Cic. Off. 2, 21, 75; id. Fam. 15, 16, 3; id. Att. 9, 11, A, 2.—
b.
With diu or dudum:
nam illi quidem haut sane diu'st quom dentes exciderunt,
Plaut. Merc. 3, 1, 42; id. As. 2, 1, 3; id. Trin. 4, 3, 3.—
c.
Peculiarly, cum referring to an action which was to be done after a period of time, before, at the end of which:
omnino biduum supererat cum exercitui frumentum metiri oporteret,
Caes. B. G. 1, 23. —
4.
In inverted clauses, the principal sentence determining the time of the clause, cum ( = quo tempore) having the force of a relative; cum with the indic. always following the principal sentence; never in oblique discourse; very freq. in class. and post-class. writings (ante-class. only Plaut. Men. 5, 8, 3; Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 40; id. Eun. 4, 2, 5); principal sentence often with jam, vix, vixdum, nondum, tantum quod, and commodum; cum often with subito, repente, sometimes interim, tamen, etiamtum.
a.
Principal sentence defining time by temporal expressions.
(α).
Principal sentence with pluperf. (1) Cum with perf. or histor. pres.:
dies nondum decem intercesserant cum ille alter filius necatur,
Cic. Clu. 9, 28; id. Verr. 1, 2, 36; id. Or. 2, 21, 89; Ov. M. 9, 715; Plin. Pan. 91, 1.—(2) Cum with histor. inf., Sall. J. 98, 2.—
(β).
Principal sentence with imperf. (1) Cum with perf. or histor. pres.:
nondum lucebat cum Ameriae scitum est,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 34, 97; Liv. 21, 59, 5; 41, 26, 2; 22, 1, 1; 9, 33, 3; 9, 37, 5; Verg. G. 2, 340; Curt. 4, 3, 16; 5, 12, 6 al.—(2) Cum with imperf., Curt. 6, 7, 1.—
(γ).
Principal sentence with perf., cum with perf.:
dies haud multi intercesserunt cum ex Leontinis praesidium... venerunt,
Liv. 24, 29, 1; 40, 48, 4.—
b.
Principal sentence not containing expressions of time; most freq. with pluperf. or imperf. in principal sentence, and perf. or histor. pres. in clause with cum, but (far more rarely) many other combinations occur.
(α).
Principal sentence with imperf., cum with perf.:
non dubitabat Minucius quin, etc., cum repente jubetur dicere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 2, 29, § 72:
jamque hoc facere noctu adparabant cum matres familiae repente... procucurrerunt,
Caes. B. G. 7, 26, 3; Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 14, § 36; Liv. 1, 36, 1 (57 times); Verg. A. 1, 36 (26 times); Vell. 2, 28, 2; Sen. Ira, 1, 18, 3; Tac. A. 3, 1 (31 times); Curt. 3, 10, 1 (19 times); Plin. Ep. 6, 24, 2.—
(β).
Principal sentence with pluperf., cum with perf. or histor. pres.:
jam Sora capta erat cum consules prima luce advenere,
Liv. 9, 24, 13 (32 times); Cic. Clu. 9, 28 (14 times); Sall. J. 60, 6; Verg. A. 1, 586 (13 times); Tac. A. 1, 19 (13 times); Curt. 3, 10, 1 (18 times). —And cum with potential subj.:
vix erat hoc plane imperatum cum illum spoliatum... videres,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 40, § 86.—
(γ).
Principal sentence with perf., Cic. Sest. 37, 39 (5 times); Liv. 2, 46, 3 (8 times).—
(δ).
Principal sentence with histor. inf., Liv. 5, 46, 1; Tac. A. 1, 11; 11, 16; Curt. 5, 9, 1; 9, 5, 1.—
(ε).
Principal sentence with histor. pres., Liv. 4, 32, 1 (3 times); Ov. M. 4, 695 (5 times).—
(ζ).
Cum with imperf., Cic. Verr. 1, 6, 17 (3 times); Sall. J. 51, 2; Liv. 44, 10, 6; Tac. A. 1, 51; 11, 26.—
(η).
Cum with [p. 495] histor. inf., Liv. 2, 27, 1; Tac. A. 2, 31 (6 times); Curt. 4, 4, 9.—
(θ).
Cum with pluperf., Liv. 2, 46, 3 (3 times); Ov. M. 14, 581; Verg. A. 2, 256 sq.—
(κ).
With logical perf., or logical perf. and pres. (rare):
quam multi enim jam oratores commemorati sunt... cum tamen spisse ad Antonium Crassumque pervenimus,
Cic. Brut. 36, 138:
jamque fuga timidum caput abdidit alte (coluber), Cum medii nexus extremaeque agmina caudae Solvuntur,
Verg. G. 3, 422.—
5.
In clauses added loosely or parenthetically to a preceding clause or to a substantive in it (the mood governed by the rules for relative clauses).
a.
When, on an occasion, on which, etc.
(α).
With perf. indic.:
Hortensium maxime probavi pro Messala dicentem, cum tu abfuisti,
Cic. Brut. 96, 328; id. Phil. 11, 8, 18; id. Dom. 9, 22; 53, 136; id. Fam. 13, 75, 1; Spart. Had. 3; Flor. 1, 18, 9 (1, 13, 19).—
(β).
With imperf. indic.:
num infitiari potes te illo ipso die meis praesidiis circumclusum commovere te non potuisse, cum tu nostra... caede contentum esse dicebas?
Cic. Cat. 1, 3, 7; id. Sest. 63, 131; id. Cael. 24, 59.—
(γ).
Cum with pres. indic., a past tense in principal sentence (mostly poet.):
nox erat et placidum carpebant fessa soporem Corpora... cum medio volvuntur sidera lapsu, Cum tacet omnis ager, etc.,
Verg. A. 4, 522; 8, 407; 12, 114; id. E. 8, 15; Hor. S. 1, 10, 31; Plin. Ep. 6, 16, 22.—
(δ).
Imperf. subj.: qui... accensi nulla deinde vi sustineri potuere, cum compulsi in castra Romani rursus obsiderentur, in consequence of which ( = ita ut), Liv. 3, 5, 8.—
(ε).
So freq. cum quidem, always with indic.:
sed uterque noster cedere cogebatur, cum quidem ille pollicitus est, se quod velletis esse facturum,
Cic. Phil. 9, 4, 9; id. Fl. 22, 53; id. Pis. 9, 21; 34, 83 and 84; id. Leg. 2, 6, 14; id. Sen. 4, 11; Suet. Caes. 50; Spart. Had. 9; id. Ael. Ver. 4.—
b.
Cum tamen, at which time however, and yet, while nevertheless, representing the principal sentence as concessive, analogous to qui tamen (v. tamen).
(α).
With indic., like qui tamen, always, except for particular reasons:
fit gemitus omnium et clamor, cum tamen a praesenti supplicio tuo continuit populus Romanus se, etc.,
Cic. Verr. 1, 5, 29, § 74; id. Pis. 12, 27; Liv. 6, 42, 11; Verg. A. 9, 513; Tac. H. 1, 62; so,
cum nihilo magis,
Nep. Dat. 10, 3; passing over into inverted cum clauses (4. b.), as Sall. J. 98, 2; Liv. 27, 20, 11.—
(β).
With subj., Cic. Phil. 2, 18, 45; id. Fam. 1, 9, 10; Liv. 4, 31, 6 (where the clause with cum is adverbial).—
6.
Cum interea (interim).
a.
Adverbial (rare).
(α).
Temporal with subj.; with subj. imperf., while, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 25, § 62; with pluperf. subj., after, id. ib. 1, 2, 9, § 25; id. Fam. 15, 43.—
(β).
Adversative, with subj., whereas during this time. (1) Pres.:
simulat se eorum praesidio conflteri, cum interea aliud quiddam jam diu machinetur,
Cic. Verr. 1, 6, 15; Val. Max. 2, 9, 1; Sen. Q. N. 1, prol. 14.—(2) With perf. subj.:
cum tu interim vero numquam significaris sententiam tuam,
Cic. Pis. 4, 9; id. Rosc. Am. 5, 11 dub.; Val. Max. 7, 8, 6.—(3) With imperf. subj., Cic. Sull. 5, 6; Plin. Pan. 76, 1.—
b.
Relative, always with indic., in class. writings always referring to a period during which, belonging,
(α).
To the attributive clauses (v. 2. supra). (1) In pres.:
anni sunt octo... cum interea Cluentianae pecuniae vestigium nullum invenitis,
Cic. Clu. 30, 82; Liv. 5, 54, 5; Plaut. Stich. 1, 1, 33.— (2) In imperf., Ter. Hec. 3, 4, 8 (2. c.).—
(β).
To the inverted clauses (4.):
tanta erat in his locis multitudo cum interim Rufio noster... hominem percussit,
Cic. Att. 5, 2, 2.—So probably: cum interim Gallus quidam processit, Quadrig. ap. Gell. 9, 13, 7; Cic. Fam. 3, 6, 5; id. Pis. 38, 92 sq.; id. Tusc. 4, 3, 6; Sall. J. 12, 5; 49, 4; Liv. 3, 37, 5; Val. Max. 8, 1, 3; 9, 7, 2; Sen. Ira, 2, 33, 4; Tac. H. 1, 60; with indefinite pres. indic. in both terms, Sen. Cons. Marc. 11, 5.—
(γ).
To the additional clauses (5.). (1) With perf. indic., Plaut. Men. 3, 1, 3; Flor. 4, 2, 69; 4, 12, 33; with inf. in oblique discourse, Liv. 4, 51, 4; 6, 27, 6.—(2) Post-Aug., and in Nep., = cum tamen (5. b.), while nevertheless, whereas, with pres. or perf. indic.:
post Leuctricam pugnam Lacedaemonii se numquam refecerunt... cum interim Agesilaus non destitit patriam juvare,
Nep. Ages. 7, 1: cum interim Oedipodis ossa... colis, Val. Max. 5, 3, ext. 3; 3, 4, 5; 4, 4, 1; Quint. 10, 1, 18; 10, 1, 11; 12, 10, 67; Tac. H. 4, 42; Suet. Claud. 6; Flor. 4, 12, 33.
F.
In clauses completing the idea of the governing verb.
1.
After verbs of perception (videre, perspicere, audire, etc.; audivi cum diceres, etc. = audivi te dicentem).
a.
Dependent on verbs of seeing and feeling.
(α).
With indic.:
nam ipsi vident eorum quom auferimus bona ( = nos auferre or auferentes),
Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 16; id. Poen. 3, 4, 13; id. Am. 5, 1, 19; id. Bacch. 3, 3, 65; id. Mil. 2, 6, 26:
conspectum est cum obiit,
Liv. 5, 25, 3.—
(β).
With subj.:
is... numquam est conspectus cum veniret,
Cic. Sest. 59, 126:
vidi... Cum tu terga dares,
Ov. M. 13, 224.—
b.
After verbs of hearing, always with subj.:
L. Flaccum ego audivi cum diceret Caeciliam exisse, etc.,
Cic. Div. 1, 46, 104; id. Par. 6, 1, 45; id. de Or. 2, 6, 22; 2, 28, 129; 2, 33, 144; 2, 37, 155; 2, 90, 365; id. Brut. 27, 85; id. Fin. 5, 19, 54; id. Fam. 3, 7, 4; Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 1.—
c.
After memini, with indic. (sc. tempus):
memini quom... haud audebat,
Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 53:
memini cum mihi desipere videbare,
Cic. Fam. 7, 28, 1.—With subj.:
memini cum velles residere ferventissimo sole,
Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 1.—
2.
After verba adfectuum, with the force of quod, always with indic. (mostly ante-class.).
a.
Verbs of thanking:
habeo gratiam tibi Quom copiam istam mi et potestatem facis,
Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 14; id. Curc. 5, 3, 21; id. As. 3, 2, 2; id. Most. 2, 2, 2; id. Poen. 1, 2, 46; 5, 4, 84 (99); Ter. And. 4, 4, 32; id. Ad. 1, 2, 59:
tibi maximas gratias ago, cum tantum litterae meae potuerunt, ut eis lectis, etc.,
Cic. Fam. 13, 24, 2.—
b.
Of congratulation:
quom tu's aucta liberis... gratulor,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 33; 2, 6, 35: L. Caesar, O mi Cicero, inquit, gratulor tibi cum tantum vales apud Dolabellam, etc., L. Caesar ap. Cic. Fam. 9, 14, 3; and ib. Att. 14, 17, A, 3.—
c.
Of rejoicing and grieving:
quom istaec res tibi ex sententia Pulcre evenit, gaudeo,
Plaut. Rud. 5, 3, 10; id. Poen. 5, 5, 48:
cum vero in C. Matii familiaritatem venisti, non dici potest quam valde gaudeam,
Cic. Fam. 7, 15, 2; Sall. J. 102, 5.—
d.
Dependent on optative sentences:
di tibi bene faciant semper quom advocatus bene mi ades,
Plaut. Mil. 5, 26; id. Poen. 3, 3, 54; 3, 3, 74; Ter. Ad. 5, 7, 19.
G.
Elliptical usages (without predicate).
1.
Cum maxime.
a.
With ut: hanc Bacchidem Amabat, ut quom maxime, tum Pamphilus ( = ut amabat tum quom maxume amabat, as much as he ever did), Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 40:
etiamne ea neglegamus, quae fiunt cum maxime, quae videmus?
Cic. Har. Resp. 15, 32.—Hence,
b.
By abbreviation: nunc cum maxime or cum maxime alone, now especially, just now: tum cum maxime, just then:
nunc cum maxume operis aliquid facere credo,
Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 2; id. Phorm. 1, 4, 26; id. Heaut. 4, 5, 40:
quae multos jam annos et nunc cum maxime filium interfectum cupit,
Cic. Clu. 5, 12:
castra amissa, et tum cum maxime ardere,
Liv. 40, 32, 1; Curt. 3, 2, 17; Sen. Ira, 1, 16, 3; id. Ben. 3, 3, 3; id. Ep. 55, 1; 55, 11; 81, 7; Tac. Or. 16; 37; Eum. pro Schol. 4; Mamert. 2.—With maxime in adverbial clauses, just while, especially when, Cic. Att. 2, 15, 3; id. Off. 1, 13, 41; id. Fam. 1, 5, a, 2; Liv. 1, 50, 7; 2, 59, 7; 3, 25, 4; 3, 31, 3; 4, 3, 1; 8, 33, 4 et saep.—
2.
Similarly with other superlatives (post-class.):
foliis ternis, aut, cum plurimum, quaternis,
at the utmost, Plin. 25, 10, 74, § 121; 18, 7, 10, § 60:
cum tardissime,
id. 18, 7, 10, § 51:
cum longissime,
Suet. Tib. 38.
H.
For co-ordinate clauses with cum... tum, v. tum, I. A. 3.
II.
Causal, since, because, as.
A.
Anteclass., chiefly with indic.
1.
With pres. indic.:
hoc hic quidem homines tam brevem vitam colunt, Quom hasce herbas hujus modi in suom alvom congerunt,
because, Plaut. Ps. 3, 2, 34; id. Truc. 1, 2, 50; 2, 4, 8:
edepol, merito esse iratum arbitror, Quom apud te tam parva'st ei fides,
since, id. Ps. 1, 5, 62; id. Most. 1, 1, 28; id. Truc. 2, 1, 32; Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 30; id. Hec. 4, 1, 53.—
2.
With perf. indic.:
praesertim quom is me dignum quoi concrederet Habuit, me habere honorem ejus ingenio decet,
Plaut. As. 1, 1, 66; Ter. And. 3, 2, 8.—
3.
With subj.
a.
By construction of principal sentence: adeon, me fuisse fungum ut qui illi crederem, Quom mi ipsum nomen ejus Clamaret, etc., Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 51; id. Capt. 1, 2, 37; Ter. Hec. 3, 2, 6; id. Eun. 3, 5, 18; 5, 2, 24.—
b.
Independent of such construction:
jam istoc probior es meo quidem animo quom in amore temperes,
Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 8 (bracketed by Goetz;
Brix conjectures temperas): nil miror si lubenter tu hic eras, Quom ego servos quando aspicio hunc lacrumem quia dijungimur,
id. Mil. 4, 8, 18 Lorenz (Brix: quin ego... lacrumo; cf.
Lubbert, Grammat. Stud. II. pp. 133, 137): Nam puerum injussu eredo non tollent meo, Praesertim in ea re quom sit mi adjutrix socrus,
Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 82; so id. Ad. 2, 1, 12.
B.
Class. and post-class., always with subj.
1.
With pres. subj.:
cum ista sis auctoritate, non debes arripere maledictum ex trivio,
Cic. Mur. 6, 13:
cum vita sine amicis insidiarum et metus plena sit, ratio ipsa monet amicitias comparare,
id. Fin. 1, 20, 66:
quae cum ita sint, videamus, etc.,
id. Clu. 44, 123:
quod cum ita sit, etc.,
id. Fam. 3, 1, 1; id. Mur. 1, 2; id. Arch. 5, 10; id. Off. 3, 3, 13; id. Rosc. Am. 8, 22; Liv. 7, 9, 5; 21, 21, 5 et saep.—
2.
With perf. subj.:
cum inimicitiae fuerint numquam, opinio injuriae beneficiis sit exstincta... rei publicae providebo,
Cic. Prov. Cons. 20, 47; id. de Or. 1, 49, 214; the perf. subj. is often retained after a principal predicate in a past tense, id. Clu. 60, 167; id. Fam. 3, 8, 4.—
3.
With imperf. subj.
a.
Denoting both cause and coincidence of time:
vacuum fundum, cum ego adessem, possidere non potuisti,
Auct. Her. 4, 29, 40; Cic. Or. 8, 25:
cum tanta multitudo lapides et tela conicerent, in muro consistendi potestas erat nulli,
Caes. B. G. 2, 6; id. B. C. 3, 1; Liv. 39, 31, 3; 4, 8, 3; 25, 11, 1.—
b.
Denoting cause without time:
cum esset egens, sumptuosus, audax... ad omnem fraudem versare suam mentem coepit,
Cic. Clu. 26, 70:
quod oppidum cum esset altissimo et munitissimo loco, ad existimationem imperii arbitratus sum, comprimere eorum audaciam,
id. Fam. 15, 4, 10; Caes. B. C. 3, 37.—
4.
With pluperf. subj.:
Caesar cum constituisset hiemare in continenti, neque multum aestatis superesset, obsides imperat, etc.,
Caes. B. G. 5, 22.
C.
With adverbs of emphasis.
1.
Praesertim cum, or cum praesertim, = especially since, the more so because:
quae cum ita sint, quid est quod de ejus civitate dubitetis, praesertim cum aliis quoque civitatibus fuerit adscriptus?
Cic. Arch. 5, 10:
cur enim tibi hoc non gratificor nescio, praesertim cum his temporibus audacia pro sapientia liceat uti,
id. Fam. 1, 10, 1:
cum praesertim vos alium miseritis,
id. Imp. Pomp. 5, 12; id. Rosc. Am. 8, 22; id. Prov. Cons. 7, 16 (cum praesertim rarely refers to time, with indic., Sen. Ep. 85, 6).—
2.
Quippe cum represents the conclusion as selfevident, since of course, since obviously:
nihil est virtute amabilius, quippe cum propter virtutem etiam eos, quos numquam videmus, quodammodo diligamus,
Cic. Lael. 8, 28:
numquam ego pecunias istorum, etc., in bonis rebus duxi, quippe cum viderem, etc.,
id. Par. 1, 1, 6; id. Leg. 1, 1, 5; 1, 20, 54; id. Fin. 3, 12, 41; 5, 28, 84; Liv. 4, 27, 8; 4, 57, 10.—Sometimes with indic. if cum refers to time, when of course, if, of course: tu vero etiam si reprehenderes... laetarer: quippe cum in reprehensione est prudentia cum eumeneiai, Cic. Att. 16, 11, 2.—In later writers with indic., because when:
omnia experiri necessitas cogebat: quippe cum primas spes fortuna destituit, futura praesentibus videntur esse potiora,
Curt. 4, 1, 29.—
3.
Utpote cum, seeing that, explanatory, with subj.:
me incommoda valetudo qua jam emerseram, utpote cum sine febri laborassem, tenebat Brundusii,
Cic. Att. 5, 8, 1; Cels. 1 prooem.; Sen. Cons. Marc. 21, 2.
III.
Adversative, while, whereas, denoting a logical contrast with the principal sentence.
A.
Ante-class., chiefly,
1.
With indic.:
hei mihi, insanire me aiunt, ultro quom ipsi insaniunt,
Plaut. Men. 5, 2, 80; id. Stich. 1, 37; id. Bacch. 5, 2, 5; Ter. Phorm. prol. 23; 2, 2, 26.—
2.
Subj.
a.
By construction of principal predicate:
tibi obtemperem quom tu mihi nequeas?
Plaut. Most. 4, 2, 16 (4, 1, 50).—
b.
Independent of construction: edepol, Cupido, quom tam pausillus sis, nimis multum vales, Naev. ap. Non. p. 421, 25 (Lubbert conjectures quom [p. 496] tu's tam pausillus):
eo vos madefacitis, quom ego sim hic siccus?
Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 52.
B.
Class. and post-class., always with subj.
1.
With pres. subj.:
cum de bonis et de caede agatur, testimonium dicturus est is qui et sector est et sicarius,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 36, 103; id. Clu. 24, 65; id. Leg. 1, 7, 22:
et cum tibi, viro, liceat purpura in veste stragula uti, matrem familias tuam purpureum amiculum habere non sines?
Liv. 34, 7, 3; Sen. Prov. 4, 10; id. Clem. 1, 18, 2; id. Ben. 2, 16, 1.—
2.
With perf. subj.: an tu, cum omnem auctoritatem universi ordinis pro pignore putaris, eamque... concideris, me his existimas pignoribus terreri? Crass. ap. Cic. de Or. 3, 1, 4:
indignatur exul aliquid sibi deesse, cum defuerit Scipioni dos?
Sen. Cons. Helv. 12, 7; id. Ira, 3, 12, 7; freq. pres. and perf. subj. retained, if dependent on preterites, Cic. Brut. 71, 250; id. Agr. 3, 2, 5.—
3.
With imperf. subj.:
ita, cum maximis eum rebus liberares, perparvam amicitiae culpam relinquebas,
Cic. Deiot. 3, 10:
hunc Egnatium censores, cum patrem eicerent, retinuerunt,
id. Clu. 48, 135:
eorum erat V. milium numerus, cum ipsi non amplius octingentos equites haberent,
Caes. B. G. 4, 11; Liv. 1, 55, 3; Cic. de Or. 1, 1, 1; 1, 53, 227; 2, 50, 203; id. Clu. 5, 12; id. Ac. 1, 10, 38 sq.; Liv. 39, 49, 1; Val. Max. 1, 6, 11; 3, 2, 10 fin. —
4.
With pluperf. subj.:
Socratis ingenium immortalitati scriptis suis Plato tradidit, cum ipse litteram Socrates nullam reliquisset,
Cic. de Or. 3, 16, 60; id. Ac. 2, 1, 2; id. Prov. Cons. 11, 27; Val. Max. 1, 8, 11.
IV.
Concessive, although, denoting a reason for the contrary of the principal sentence.
A.
Ante-class., mostly with indic.
1.
Indic.:
qui it lavatum In balineas, quom ibi sedulo sua vestimenta servat, Tam subripiuntur,
Plaut. Rud. 2, 3, 52; Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 12; Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 26; id. Truc. 1, 2, 89 (95); id. Stich. 1, 2, 67.—
2.
With subj.: nihilominus ipsi lucet, quom illi accenderit, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 16, 51 (Trag. Rel. v. 389 Rib.).
B.
Class. and post-class., always with subj.
1.
Pres. subj.:
testis est Graecia, quae cum eloquentiae studio sit incensa, jamdiuque excellat in ea... tamen omnis artis vetustiores habet,
Cic. Brut. 7, 26:
nam (Druentia) cum aquae vim vehat ingentem, non tamen navium patiens est,
Liv. 21, 31, 11.—
2.
Imperf. subj.:
ego autem, cum consilium tuum probarem, et idem ipse sentirem, nihil proficiebam,
Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 1:
non poterant tamen, cum cuperent, Apronium imitari,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 34, § 78; id. de Or. 1, 28, 126; id. Brut. 7, 28; 91, 314; id. Inv. 2, 31, 97; id. Clu. 40, 110; Caes. B. G. 5, 40; Liv. 5, 38, 5; Nep. Att. 13, 1; so,
quae cum ita essent... tamen,
although this was so, Cic. Clu. 34, 94; id. Fam. 2, 16, 2.—
3.
With pluperf. subj.:
cui cum Cato et Caninius intercessissent, tamen est perscripta,
Cic. Fam. 1, 2, 4:
patrem meum, cum proscriptus non esset, jugulastis,
id. Rosc. Am. 11, 32.
V.
In hypothetical clauses, always with imperf. or pluperf. subj., = si, but defining an assumed or fictitious time.
1.
With imperf. subj.:
quis ex populo, cum Scaevolam dicentem audiret in ea causa, quicquam politius aut elegantius exspectaret?
Cic. Brut. 55, 194:
etiam tum quiesceretis cum rem publicam a facinorosissimis sicariis esse oppressam videretis?
id. Sest. 38, 81; id. Rosc. Am. 31, 86; id. Verr. 2, 1, 10, §§ 28 and 29.—
2.
With pluperf. subj.:
quod esset judicium cum de Verris turpissimo comitatu tres recuperatorum nomine adsedissent?
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 12, § 30:
mors cum exstinxisset invidiam, res ejus gestae sempiterni nominis glorianiterentur,
id. Balb. 6, 16.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Cum

Страницы

Следующая →

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

См. также в других словарях:

word — {{Roman}}I.{{/Roman}} noun 1 unit of language ADJECTIVE ▪ two letter, three letter, etc. ▪ monosyllabic, polysyllabic ▪ two syllable, three syllable … Collocations dictionary

-word — [[t] wɜ͟ː(r)d[/t]] words COMB in N COUNT You can use word after a letter of the alphabet to refer politely or humorously to a word beginning with that letter which people find offensive or are embarrassed to use. It was the first show to use the… … English dictionary

Word Association — is a common word game involving an exchange of words that are associated together.How to playOnce an original word has been chosen, usually randomly or arbitrarily, a player will find a word that they associate with it and make it known to all… … Wikipedia

word — 1 noun LANGUAGE/STH YOU SAY OR WRITE 1 (C) the smallest unit of language that people can understand if it is said or written on its own: Write an essay of about five hundred words. | There were a lot of words in the film I couldn t understand. |… … Longman dictionary of contemporary English

BEGINNING UNTIL THE MONARCHY — the patriarchs of israel the exodus and wanderings in sinai the conquest and settlement of canaan the judges The Patriarchs of Israel The beginning of the history of Israel, like that of many other nations, is obscure. The passage of time caused… … Encyclopedia of Judaism

Word, The — (Gr. Logos), one of the titles of our Lord, found only in the writings of John (John 1:1 14; 1 John 1:1; Rev. 19:13). As such, Christ is the revealer of God. His office is to make God known. No man hath seen God at any time; the only begotten… … Easton's Bible Dictionary

Contact (word game) — Contact is a word guessing game for three or more players. In Contact, one person (the wordmaster or target word person ) thinks of a word (the target word ), and the objective of the other players is to guess that target word, one letter at a… … Wikipedia

History of the word 'fuck' — In the modern English speaking world, the word fuck is often considered highly offensive. Most English speaking countries censor it on television and radio. A study of the attitudes of the British public found that fuck was considered the third… … Wikipedia

Word Is Out: Stories of Some of Our Lives — Word Is Out Theatrical release poster Directed by Mariposa Film Group Peter Adair Nancy Adair Andrew Brown Rob Epstein … Wikipedia

beginning — beginning, genesis, rise, initiation are comparable when they mean the first part or stage of a process or development. Although beginning, often in the plural form beginnings, may mean the point at which a person or thing commences its existence … New Dictionary of Synonyms

s-word — noun a) The word shit, regarded as a vulgar or taboo word. b) Any word beginning with s that is not normally taboo but is considered (often humorously) to be so in the given context; for example, socialism. See Also: word, b word, c word, f word … Wiktionary

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

a word beginning with J

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

a word beginning with J

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: